JP7431478B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic display. [Solution] When a certain operation is performed by an operating means in a first period of a certain presentation state, an explanatory display regarding the certain presentation state is displayed, and when the operation is performed in a second period of the certain presentation state. When the certain operation by the means is performed, a menu display can be displayed without displaying the explanation display regarding the certain production state, and a first display regarding the explanation display can be displayed in the first period. . [Selection diagram] Figure 23

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine, for example, has been known as one type of gaming machine. Some of these slot machines have a display that provides information regarding the operation of a stop button to derive a stop mode that is advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-87308

However, there is still room for improvement in the display performed by such gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a distinctive display.

The present invention provides a game machine comprising a setting means capable of setting one performance state among a plurality of performance states, and an operation means, wherein the plurality of performance states include a certain performance state. When a certain operation is performed by the operating means during a first period of the certain presentation state, an explanatory display regarding the certain presentation state is displayed, and when the operation is performed during a second period of the certain presentation state. When the certain operation by the means is performed, a menu display is displayed without displaying the explanation display regarding the certain production state, and a first display regarding the explanation display can be displayed during the first period. In the first period after the display of the explanation display is finished, the first display is not displayed, and in the first period when the first display is not displayed, the operation means is not displayed. The game machine is characterized in that when a certain operation is performed, the explanatory display is displayed, and the first display is a display that notifies that the explanatory display can be displayed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a distinctive display.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Flow of second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows. (a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a character accompanying state of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing characters displayed on a performance image display device in a character accompanying state of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing the simultaneous lottery processing in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a table showing the simultaneous lottery processing in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a table which shows typically CZ transition lottery processing in a section normal state. (a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an example of production when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention shifts from a non-accompanied state to a accompanied state and then shifts to a non-accompanied state in an advantageous section normal state; , (b) is a diagram showing a time chart when two characters shift from an accompanying state to a non-accompanied state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of performance in one predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of performance in one predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing character arrangement lottery processing in CZ of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a table showing selection in CZ of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a table schematically showing character point lottery processing, and (c) is a table schematically showing AT lottery processing in CZ of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a table showing the lottery probability of the push order bell of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, the maximum number of coins to be paid out in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content. It is an example of performance in one predetermined game of CZ of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a table schematically showing a simultaneous lottery process in a normal AT state of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and (b) is a table showing a normal AT state of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a table schematically showing the number-addition lottery process and specialized zone lottery process in the state. It is a diagram showing a time chart and performance of a game in which the player wins the push order bell_LCR and obtains 123 additional coins in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a time chart and performance of a game in which the player wins the push order bell_RLC and obtains 231 additional coins in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect of a game in which the player wins the push order bell_RCL in the specialized zone of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, wins a prize, and obtains 321 additional coins. (a) to (h) are diagrams chronologically showing screen transitions in explanatory displays (Example 1) tailored to performance situations. (i) to (l) are diagrams chronologically showing screen transitions in explanation displays (Example 2) tailored to performance situations. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing screen transitions in chronological order in an explanation display (Example 3) tailored to the production situation. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing screen transitions in chronological order in an explanation display (Embodiment 4) tailored to the performance situation. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change in the display mode such as displaying the number of AT remaining Gs and displaying the number of acquired medals. It is a diagram showing the flow of a game in stock priority order (Example 1). It is a diagram showing the flow of a game in stock priority order (Example 2). It is a diagram showing the flow of a game in stock priority order (Example 3). (a) This is a table showing the lottery probability of the pressed order bell of the present embodiment, the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the operation contents of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the number of coins to be paid out, which is the same as the table explained using FIG. This is a modified example. (b) A diagram schematically showing an outline of the AT lottery when the push order bell is won. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of changes in the game state, effects, etc. when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) is successful. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 1 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 1. (c) It is a diagram showing an example of the winning combination in which the additional lottery 2 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 2. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a change in the game state, an effect, etc. when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) fails. (b) It is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations in which the additional lottery 3 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 3. 12 is a flowchart showing the flow of standby instruction information setting processing. (a) to (d) are diagrams illustrating an example of a push order navigation effect during a standby state. (e) to (f), (f') are diagrams showing an example of a "x??" press order guessing performance. (g) to (j) are diagrams illustrating an example in which a "7" aim display is performed after the "x??" press order guess effect. (a) to (g) are diagrams illustrating an example of displaying the amount of acquired value in chronological order. (h) It is a diagram showing an example of the symbols forming the blessing display SP, the number of acquired coins corresponding to each symbol, the first display time, and the redisplay time. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a gaming system 10 according to the present embodiment. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing the flow up to login of the gaming system 10 in chronological order. (f) to (k) are diagrams chronologically showing the flow from login to intermediate progress viewing in the gaming system 10. (a) to (h) are diagrams chronologically showing the flow from after login to the end of game recording in the gaming system 10. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of two-dimensional code issuance before displaying mission accomplishment and after displaying mission accomplishment. (b) A diagram illustrating, in chronological order, a modified example of issuing a two-dimensional code before displaying the mission accomplishment. (a) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of the effect when there is no character corresponding to the birthday in a certain game period. (b) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of an effect when a princess character's birthday is included in a certain game period. (a) It is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of the performance when the birthday of the lord's character is included in a certain game period. (b) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of an effect when the birthday of an unreleased character is included in a certain game period. 7(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of the flow from displaying a menu to displaying a character selection screen. FIG. (e) to (g) are diagrams showing examples of birthday icons. (g') A diagram showing a modification of (g). (a) A diagram showing an example of count notification and alert notification using an old man's voice (custom voice). (b) is a diagram showing an example of a count notification using a voice (default voice). (a) A diagram showing another example of switching timing of character setting status 2 (count notification). (b) It is a diagram showing an example of a count notification and an alert notification when the game is set to a logout state and then becomes a login state again before one game is executed. (a) to (f) are diagrams showing an example of a two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated. (g) to (j) are diagrams showing modified examples of two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment A]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the reel window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are being bet, three horizontal winning lines (the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line) will be valid, and the medal will be When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line may be made valid as the winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five lines, and may be one horizontal winning line in the middle. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, upper horizontal winning line, lower horizontal winning line, right down winning line, and right up winning line are set as valid winning lines. Alternatively, the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically (bet operation) using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141. It is a meaning that includes.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as the left stop button), and the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as the middle stop button). By doing so, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as a right stop button), the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 as a stop operation is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." In addition, in this embodiment, the order of operations based on the combination of the stop operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is "left", a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Sometimes written as "left center right." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that executes a presentation to be described later. For example, an operation navigation is executed to notify information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information by individual players). The information display button 191 includes a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of a plurality of options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and by operating each arrow key, the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow. The OK button 191b is a button that confirms the option on which the cursor is positioned. In this embodiment, it is used, for example, to set information using the user menu, to set volume and light intensity, and to select a character (stage) for a performance performed after winning a bonus. In this embodiment, the information display button 191 may be referred to as a cross button 191.

The production button 192 is a button that can be operated when performing a production that prompts the user to operate the button. In this embodiment, when the performance button 192 is operated, a performance suggesting the award of benefits such as the number of additional tickets at AT is executed as a response performance.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 2. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, information display button 191 sensor, production button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. The information display button 191 sensor detects the operation of the information display button 191, and the effect button 192 sensor detects the operation of the effect button 192. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

The main control section 300 also includes an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 425 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 3. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 1 to 20) of a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 1 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell” symbol, the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “watermelon” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “ Seven 1" designs are arranged on each.

<Slot machine processing>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined. In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including an activation combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally won combination is activated (the flag of that winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In addition, to give an overview of the internal winning probability of each winning combination, the internal winning probability of each winning combination is based on random numbers obtained during the internal lottery, which will be described later, using numerical data that falls within the range of lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data in the range (65536 in this embodiment). The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one role, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. .

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. Regarding the reel stop data of winning combinations in which the stop operation order is questioned, the operation conditions are also set, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control is performed to transition the gaming state (RT-based gaming state, AT-based gaming state), and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made to start BB gaming from the next time. do. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 5) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6. Note that FIG. 6A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 6(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 6(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 6(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7. Note that FIG. 7A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 7(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 7(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 7A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 7(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the gameplay of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing the overall game flow, and is a transition diagram of a gaming state (also referred to as an AT-based gaming state, hereinafter abbreviated as a gaming state) regarding the performance of the main control unit 300.

-Advantageous section/non-advantageous section The gaming state is first broadly divided into non-advantageous section and advantageous section. The non-advantageous section is an initial state, and is a period in which the operation navigation cannot be executed. A non-advantageous section normal state exists in the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a period during which the operation navigation can be executed. Here, the operation navigation is a performance that uses the performance image display device 157 and the payout number display 127 to notify the details of the stop operations that will help you win a prize, including the order of stop operations and the timing of the stop operations (internal winning combinations). This is a performance that informs people of the following. The advantageous section includes an advantageous section normal state, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), a normal AT state, a specialization zone, a pullback chance zone, and an ending state. In this embodiment, the non-advantageous section normal state, the advantageous section normal state, and CZ are collectively referred to as the "normal state." Further, the normal AT state, the specialization zone, the pullback chance zone, and the ending state are collectively referred to as the "AT state."

Regarding the state transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section, if a predetermined condition is met in the normal state of the non-advantageous section (for example, in a case other than a loss based on the winning combination in the internal lottery process), the state transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section. (See route R1 in FIG. 8(a)). On the other hand, when the AT state of the advantageous section ends, a transition is made to the non-advantageous section normal state of the non-advantageous section (see route R2 in FIG. 8(a)). However, there may be cases where the AT state ends but the transition to the non-advantageous section does not occur (for example, when the AT state ends and the advantageous section transitions to the normal state). Note that the AT state of this embodiment is a differential number management type AT state, and when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches a specified number of sheets, the AT state ends. Here, the difference in number of coins refers to the difference between the number of paid out and inserted number of game media (for example, medals).

-Character accompanying state In this embodiment, the game state can be classified from the viewpoint of which character accompanies the main character (lord). Hereinafter, this game state will be referred to as a character accompanying state. The character accompanying state includes ``non-accompanying state'' where only Tono appears in the production, ``princess accompanying condition'' where Tono is accompanied by the princess, and ``character accompanying state'' where Tono is accompanied by the old man. There is a state in which the grandpa is accompanied by an old man, and a state in which the princess and the grandpa accompany the lord and appear in the production. The state of accompanying the princess, the state of accompanying the grandfather, and the state of accompanying the grandfather and the princess are collectively referred to as the "accompanying state." In this embodiment, the accompanied state is more advantageous for the player than the non-accompanied state. For example, the probability of transitioning from the current gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state is set to be high (for example, transition from advantageous section normal state to CZ state, transition from CZ to AT state, and transition from AT state to specialized zone). (with a high probability of transitioning to the current state), the continuation of an advantageous gaming state is set to be longer (for example, AT is added, and the end conditions of the AT state are set more advantageously), or special A performance (for example, a corresponding role winning notification performance that is executed when a corresponding role of an accompanying character is won, which will be described later) is executed.

FIG. 9 shows the characters displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the accompanying state of each character. Specifically, FIG. 9(a) shows the character in the non-accompanying state, FIG. 9(b) shows the character in the princess accompanying state, FIG. 9(c) shows the character in the grandfather accompanying state, and FIG. 9(d) shows the character in the grandfather accompanying state. & Shows the character in the state of accompanying the princess.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8(b), character accompanying states exist in the advantageous section normal state, CZ, and normal AT state. FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the game state and the character accompanying state shown in FIG. 8(a). For example, in the advantageous section normal state, there are a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an grandfather accompanying state, and a grandfather & princess accompanying state, and in CZ, a princess accompanying state and a grandfather accompanying state. The normal AT state includes a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an grandfather accompanying state, and a grandfather and princess accompanying state. However, the character accompanying state may be set in a game state other than the advantageous section normal state, CZ, or normal AT state. For example, a character accompanying state may be set in the ending state. In this case, in the ending state, if a corresponding role of the companion character, which will be described later, is won, a setting suggestion performance that suggests a setting value may be executed, or the probability of execution may be increased.

- Advantageous section normal state In the advantageous section normal state, a CZ shift lottery process is executed to determine whether to shift to the CZ state every game. When winning the CZ shift lottery, the advantageous section normal state shifts to CZ (see route R3 in FIG. 8(a)). In rare cases, if special conditions are met (for example, if you win a rare combination), you can directly change from the normal state of the advantageous section to the AT state without going through the CZ state from the normal state of the advantageous section. There are cases where the transition occurs (see route R4 in FIG. 8(a)).

FIG. 10(a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used for the accompanying lottery process) in the normal state of the advantageous section, and FIG. It is a table schematically showing a CZ transition lottery process in a normal state (more specifically, a CZ entry lottery table used for the CZ transition lottery process).

The accompanying lottery process is a lottery process for determining an accompanying character, and is executed every game. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(a), the accompanying lottery process is executed based on the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, if you win a watermelon, the old man will be selected as the accompanying character with a 25% selection rate, and if you win the chance, the old man will be selected as the accompanying character with a 100% selection rate, and the weak cherry will be selected. If you win, the princess will be selected as the accompanying character with a 25% selection rate, and if you win the strong cherry, the princess will be selected as the accompanying character with a 100% selection rate.

Note that the initial character accompanying state in the advantageous section normal state is a non-accompanying state. In addition, the accompanying state once set (for example, princess accompanying state, grandfather accompanying state, grandfather & princess accompanying state) is maintained during the guaranteed number of games (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), and the guaranteed number of games is The accompaniment ending lottery is executed every game after the elapsed time (specifically, in the princess accompanying state, the princess accompanying ending lottery ends the princess accompanying state, in the grandfather accompanying state, the grandfather accompanying ending lottery ends the grandfather accompanying state, Grandpa & Princess In the accompanying state, it is determined whether the accompanying state ends or continues based on the results of the princess accompanying ending lottery to end the princess accompanying state and the grandfather accompanying ending lottery to end the grandfather accompanying state. For example, the accompaniment ending lottery may be a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 based on a bet operation or a start lever operation, or the accompaniment state may end when the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process is a replay. . Furthermore, in a state in which two characters are accompanying each other, that is, in an accompanying state of the old man and the princess, regulations are made so that the accompanying state does not end for two consecutive games. This is a measure to reduce player disappointment. For example, in the grandfather and princess accompanying state, if the grandfather accompanying state ends in the Nth game, the princess accompanying state is regulated so as not to end in the N+1th game. Hereinafter, this regulation will also be referred to as the companion termination regulation. In addition, in this embodiment, although the accompanying termination regulation is a restriction that the accompanying state does not end after two consecutive games, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a player wins one lottery to end a match, it may be prohibited to win another lottery to end a match for a predetermined number of games (eg, 5 games, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in this embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated with each other. Specifically, the character associated with watermelon and chance is an old man, and the character associated with weak cherry and strong cherry is princess. Hereinafter, the winning role associated with the accompanying character will be referred to as the "corresponding role of the accompanying character."

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the CZ transfer lottery process is executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, in the non-accompanied state, the probability of winning the CZ when winning a watermelon or a weak cherry is 0%, and the probability of winning a CZ when winning a chance or a strong cherry is 2%. For example, if you are with the old man, the probability of winning CZ when you win a watermelon is 25%, the probability of winning CZ when you win a chance is 55%, and the probability of winning a weak cherry or a strong cherry. In this case, the probability of winning CZ is 0%.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), in this embodiment, transition to CZ is easier in the accompanied state than in the non-accompanied state. Also, even in the accompanying state, it is easier to transition to CZ when two characters are accompanying each other (old man and princess accompanying state) than when one character is accompanying one character (princess accompanying state, grandfather accompanying state). It becomes. In addition, in the internal lottery process for winning combinations in the accompanying state, if a character corresponding to the accompanying character is won, it is easier to shift to CZ than when winning any other combination.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the grandfather's corresponding role (watermelon, chance) in the grandfather accompanying state and moving to CZ, and the probability of winning the princess's corresponding role (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the princess accompanying state. The probability of transitioning to CZ is the same, but it is not the same, and the probability of winning the corresponding role of the accompanying character in one accompanying state is higher than the probability of winning the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the other accompanying state. It may be treated preferentially.

- Game progress in the advantageous section normal state Next, the game progress in the advantageous section normal state will be explained using FIG.

FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating a time chart and an example of performance showing in chronological order how the game progresses when the game progresses from the non-accompanied state to the accompanied state and then to the non-accompanied state.

In FIG. 11(a), since the accompanying lottery was won in the M+1 game (a case where the accompanying lottery was won based on the weak cherry winning, see FIG. 10(a)), the princess accompanying state starts from the M+1 game, and the M+21 This shows a case where the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state ends in the game. Note that although the princess accompanying state has started from the M+1 game, the princess accompanying precursor effect is being executed on the effect image display device 157 of the M+1 game (for example, the princess appears only half of the time on the screen). (See Figure 11(a-1)). In this way, the character accompanying state and the performance state on the performance image display device 157 do not necessarily match. Note that even if the princess accompanying precursor performance is executed on the performance image display device 157, the character accompanying state is the princess accompanying state, so the CZ transition lottery is performed based on the princess accompanying state (FIG. 10) b)). However, when a precursor performance is being performed, a CZ transfer lottery may be performed based on the non-accompanying state.

In addition, in FIG. 11(a), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the M+21st game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the M+22nd game, and the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started in the M+23rd game. The figure shows a case where the non-accompanying state starts from the M+23rd game because the princess won the lottery to end the accompaniment to the princess. In addition, in the M+22 game, since the accompaniment end lottery (princess accompaniment end lottery) was not won, an image of the princess accompaniment state is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 11 (a-2)), and M+23 Since the game was won in the accompaniment ending lottery (princess accompaniment ending lottery), after the accompaniment ending lottery, a blackout image is displayed on the performance image display device 157 (see FIG. 11(a-3)), and then , an image of the non-accompanied state is displayed (see FIG. 11(a-4)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the accompanying state ends, the accompanying character is erased via the blackout or whiteout end image, and then the image of the non-accompanying state is displayed. To make a player clearly aware that the character accompanying state has changed. Note that when transitioning from an accompanying state image to a non-accompanied state image, the method is not limited to this method; for example, the screen of the effect image display device 157 may be temporarily shut off using a sliding door or a shutter, and then the transition may be performed. Alternatively, when the character accompanying state ends, the stage may be changed to clearly notify that the character accompanying state has been changed.

FIG. 11(b) is a time chart chronologically showing how the game progresses when two characters shift from an accompanying state to a non-accompanied state.

In FIG. 11(b), the accompanying lottery was won in the N+1st game after passing through the Nth game in the princess accompanying state (20 games remaining) (a case where the accompanying lottery was won based on the watermelon win. FIG. 10(a) ), shows the case where the grandfather & princess accompanying state starts from the N+1st game, the guaranteed number of games for the princess accompanying state ends at the N+21st game, and the guaranteed number of games for the grandfather accompanying state ends at the N+22nd game. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 11(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the N+21st game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+22nd game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+22nd game. (Princess accompaniment ending lottery) was won, so the N+22nd game shows the case where the grandpa is accompanied.

In addition, in FIG. 11(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the grandfather accompanying state has ended in the N+22nd game, the accompanying end lottery (grandfather accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+23rd game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+23rd game. This shows a case where the player wins the Grandfather Accompanying End Lottery, but maintains the Grandfather Accompanying Status due to the above-mentioned Accompanying Termination Regulations. However, since the player won in the N+24th game of the next game (grandfather accompanying end lottery), the grandfather accompanying state is ended, and the N+24th game is a case in which a non-accompanying state is started. As described above, in this embodiment, since the companion state is restricted from ending over two consecutive games, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disappointed.

- Production of the normal state of the advantageous section Next, the production of the normal state of the advantageous section will be explained using FIGS. 12 and 13. FIGS. 12 and 13 show an example of performance in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state.

FIG. 12(a) shows the effect image display device 157 when a weak cherry is won and a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the non-accompanied state (see the character in FIG. 12(a-1)). This is an example of a displayed image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 12(a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 12(a-2)). After the third stop operation (see image d1), based on the weak cherry winning, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning of the weak cherry (see image d2 in FIG. 12(a-3)).

FIG. 12(b) shows the effect image display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(b-1)). This is an example of a displayed image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 12(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 12(b-2)). (See image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the winning of a weak cherry, perform a weak cherry winning notification effect to notify the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 of FIG. 12(b-3)), as well as a display exclusively for the princess accompanying state. A weak cherry winning notification effect is executed (see image d3 in FIG. 12(b-3); for example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression, unlike a stopped state). In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect indicating that the accompanying character (princess) has won the corresponding role (weak cherry) is executed. In addition, in the princess accompanying state, strong cherry is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so if strong cherry is won in the winning role internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state and strong cherry is won, image d3 will be displayed and the accompanying character will be displayed. A corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d3 in FIG. 12(b-3)) indicating that the character's corresponding role (strong cherry) has been won is executed.

As a result, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, that is, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. By executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that a special effect has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, in other words, players who know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. In addition, by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character and stimulate the player's desire to play.

FIG. 12(c) shows an image displayed on the performance image display device 157 in the case where a watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 12(c-1)). This is an example of an image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 12(c), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 12(c-2)). After the third stop operation (see image d1), based on the watermelon winning, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 12(c-3)). In the princess accompanying state, since Watermelon is not a corresponding role of the accompanying character, unlike in FIG. 12(b), the corresponding role winning notification effect is not executed.

FIG. 13(a) shows an image displayed on the performance image display device 157 when a watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 13(a-1)). This is an example of an image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 13(a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 13(a-2)). (See image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the watermelon winning, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning watermelon (see image d4 in FIG. 13(a-3)), and a watermelon winning only for the grandfather accompanying state is executed. A notification effect is executed (see image d5 in FIG. 13(a-3). For example, image d5 in which the old man has a smiling expression, which is different from the stopped state). In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect ((see image d5 in FIG. 13 (a-3)) indicating that the accompanying character's corresponding role (watermelon) has been won is displayed. Execute.In addition, in the grandfather accompanying state, the chance eye is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so the image d5 is also displayed if the chance eye wins in the winning role internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather accompanying state and the chance eye wins. Then, a corresponding role winning notification effect indicating that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role (chance) is executed.

As a result, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or chance item in the grandfather accompanying state, that is, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character, By executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, it is possible to make the player recognize that a special performance has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. In addition, for players who know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or chance item in the grandfather accompanying state, that is, players who know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. By executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character and stimulate the player's desire to play.

FIG. 13(b) shows an effect image display device in the case where a weak cherry is won and a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather and princess accompanying state (see the characters in FIG. 13(b-1)). This is an example of an image displayed on 157. According to the production example shown in FIG. 13(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 13(b-2)). Based on the third stop operation and the winning of a weak cherry (see image d1), a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 of FIG. 13(b-3)), and the grandfather and princess are accompanied. Execute a special weak cherry winning notification effect (see image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 12(b-3). For example, image d3 where the princess has a smiling expression, unlike the old man and the princess who are in a stopped state. and image d5) in which the old man has a smiling expression. In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect ((image of Fig. 12 (b-3) d3 and image d5).In addition, in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, Strong Cherry, Chance, and Watermelon are also the corresponding roles of the accompanying characters, so in the winning combination internal lottery process of the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, strong If a cherry, chance, or watermelon is won, image d3 and image d5 are also displayed, indicating that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role (strong cherry, chance, or watermelon). Execute the corresponding role winning notification performance.

FIG. 13(c) shows the performance image display device 157 when a watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather and princess accompanying state (see the characters in FIG. 13(c-1)). This is an example of a displayed image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 13(c), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 13(c-2)). Based on the watermelon winning after the third stop operation (see image d1), a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 13(c-3)), and a watermelon winning notification effect is executed (see image d4 in FIG. 13(c-3)), and is exclusive to the Grandfather & Princess accompanying state. (See images d3 and d5 in FIG. 12(c-3). For example, images d3 and d5 show the princess smiling, unlike the grandfather and princess in a stopped state. Image d5) shows a smiling expression. In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect (images d3 and 12 in FIG. 12 (c-3) (see image d5).

In this way, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For players who do not know, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed to make them aware that a special performance has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. can be done. In addition, players who know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For the players who know the game, by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character, thereby stimulating the player's desire to play. In particular, the state in which two characters accompany each other is more advantageous than the state in which one character accompanies (see Figure 10(b)), so the corresponding role winning announcement performance is performed by two accompanying characters. In this case, the player's interest can be further improved. In addition, in the grandfather & princess accompanying state, the image d3 displayed in the corresponding role notification performance in the princess accompanying state and the image d5 displayed in the corresponding role notification performance in the princess accompanying state are displayed as the corresponding role winning notification performance. However, the image is not limited to the image d3 and the image d5, and an image that is only displayed when the old man and the princess are together may be displayed.

・CZ
CZ is a gaming state in which the player aims to earn points in a predetermined period (for example, 20 games in the case of this embodiment). After the predetermined period ends, the CZ executes an AT lottery process to determine whether to transition to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period. If the player wins the AT lottery process in CZ, the player moves to the AT normal state (see route R5 in FIG. 8(a)), and if the AT lottery player does not win the AT lottery process, the player moves to the advantageous section normal state ( (See route R3 in FIG. 8(a)). FIG. 14(c) is a table schematically showing the AT lottery process (more specifically, the AT lottery table by point used for the AT lottery process).

As shown in FIG. 14(c), in this embodiment, if the total value of points earned during the 20 game period is 500 points or 0 to 50 points, there is a 100% probability, that is, the AT state is definitely reached. It is set to migrate. Furthermore, in the case of 51 points or more, the higher the total value of points acquired toward 500 points, the higher the probability of transitioning to the AT state.

The CZ character accompaniment state is determined by executing an accompaniment lottery process at the time of transition from the advantageous section normal state. The determined accompanying character remains the same during the 20 games. Specifically, in the accompanying lottery process, either the princess or the grandfather is determined, so the princess accompanying state or the grandfather accompanying state is set and CZ is started (see FIG. 8(b)). In other words, in CZ, a non-accompanying state or an old man and princess accompanying state are never set.

A mechanism in which points are awarded in the CZ in the accompanying state set in this way will be explained using FIGS. 14(a), 14(b), and FIG. 16. Note that FIG. 16 shows an example of performance in one predetermined game of CZ.

In CZ, a character corresponding to each reel is determined by a character arrangement lottery process at the time of a bet operation in each game. FIG. 14A is a table schematically showing a character arrangement lottery process (more specifically, a character arrangement pattern lottery table used in the character arrangement lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(a), pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 20%. When pattern 1 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a non-accompanying character, the middle reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. On the other hand, when pattern 2 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a ninja, the middle reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. That is, in any case, the accompanying character set in the character arrangement lottery process is associated with the right reel 112. For example, in the game shown in FIG. 16(a), pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 16(a-1)). Note that the game shown in FIG. 16(b) and the game shown in FIG. 16(c) also show a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (FIG. 16( b-1), see Figure 16(c-1)).

In a CZ game after such a character arrangement, if the push order bell is internally won and the content of the first stop operation matches the notification content of the operation navigation, it will be associated with the first stop reel of the game. You can earn points based on the characters you play.

First, the push order bell of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a table showing the lottery probability of the push order bell, the number of coins to be paid out in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content according to the present embodiment. The push order bell is made up of duplicate combinations, and if a winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination will differ depending on the details of the stop operation (for example, the order of the stop operation), and the number of coins to be paid out will also differ. It is composed of The maximum number of coins to be paid out is given when the stop operations are performed in the correct order of stop operations. In addition, (1) LCR operation is used to stop the left middle right, (2) LRC operation is used to stop the left and right middle, (3) CLR operation is used to stop the middle left and right, (4) CRL operation is used to stop the middle right and left. , (5) A stop operation between right and left is sometimes referred to as an RLC operation, and (6) a stop operation between right and left is sometimes referred to as an RCL operation.

The push order bells in this embodiment are (1) push order bell_LCR for which LCR operation is the correct operation, (2) push order bell_LRC for which LRC operation is the correct operation, (3) push order bell_LRC for which CLR operation is the correct operation. Push order bell_CLR, (4) Push order bell_CRL, where CRL operation is the correct operation, (5) Push order bell_RLC, where RLC operation is the correct operation, (6) RCL operation is the correct operation. It is subdivided into six pressing order bell_RCL. For example, if the push order bell _LCR is internally won and the LCR operation is performed, if the LCR operation that is the correct stop operation is performed, 6 medals will be paid out and the push order bell _CRL will be internally won. However, if the CRL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals will be paid out, and if the push order bell_RCL is internally won, and if the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals will be paid out. medals will be paid out.

Furthermore, in CZ, if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation is executed. Therefore, in a game where the CZ press order bell has been internally won, if you perform the correct stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, you will be able to obtain the maximum number of payouts that can be given in the game and the first stop. You can earn points for the character associated with the reels. Here, the number of points based on the character (hereinafter also referred to as selected character) associated with the first stop reel is determined by the selected character point lottery process. FIG. 14(b) is a table schematically showing a selected character point lottery process (more specifically, a point lottery table for each selected character used in the selected character point lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(b), when the selected character is a non-accompanying character, 25 points are awarded with an 80% selection probability, and 55 points are awarded with a 20% selection probability. . Also, if the selected character is a companion character, 25 points will be given with a 10% selection probability, 55 points will be given with a 45% selection probability, 100 points will be given with a 35% probability, and 10% 200 points will be awarded with a probability of .

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in this embodiment, when the selected character is a Tono or Shinobi (expected point value is 61.25) than when the selected character is a non-accompanying character (expected point value is 31). The expected point value to be earned is larger, and the expected point value to be earned is higher when the selected character is a companion character (expected point value is 82.25) than when the selected character is Tono or Shinobu. The value is set to be large. In this manner, in this embodiment, it is easy to obtain high points when the selected character is an accompanying character. In other words, if you win Push Order Bell_RCL or Push Order Bell_RCL, which is the push order bell for which the first stop operation right is the correct answer, and the first stop reel is set to the right, the expected point value obtained will be larger. It is set.

・CZ production Figure 16(a) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _CRL is internally won and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation in the state where the princess is accompanied by a selected character point. Shows the effect when selected. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is Tono and the number of points 55 with a selection rate of 55% is selected.

In this case, based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), characters are arranged and displayed on each reel, and based on the start operation (start lever operation), the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed (for example, Fig. 16(a) -2), the number 312 is displayed in accordance with the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation order.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for the other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points earned with the selected character is displayed (for example, characters such as 55Pt are displayed along with the image of the lord), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ is displayed. (For example, 55Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen).

FIG. 16(b) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _RCL is internally won in state) and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, and 200 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. It shows the performance of. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is a princess (accompanying character) and the number of points 200 with a selection rate of 10% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, Fig. 16(b) -2), the number 321 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number for the other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points earned will be displayed along with the selected character (for example, characters such as "Get 200 Points" will be displayed along with an image of the princess), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ will be displayed. (For example, 200Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen).

FIG. 16(c) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _LCR is internally won in state) and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, and 25 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. It shows the performance of. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 14(b), the selected character is an old man (non-accompanying character), and the effect is shown when 25 points with a selection rate of 80% are selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, Fig. 16(b) -2), the number 123 is displayed according to the correct stop operation according to the corresponding reel position.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for other stop operations), the first stop After the operation, the number of points earned will be displayed along with the selected character (for example, an image of an old man and words such as "Get 25 points" will be displayed), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ will be displayed. (For example, 250Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.)

In addition, in FIG. 16, explanation was given of a game in which the push order bell was internally won in CZ, but even in a game in which the push order bell was not internally won in CZ, the character arrangement lottery process is executed, and each reel is Although the corresponding characters are displayed in an array, no points are awarded because the selected character point lottery process is not executed.

Furthermore, in the above description, the CZ is a fixed period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), but it is not limited to this. For example, if a rare combination is won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the CZ game period may be extended or the number of games may not be counted.

- Normal AT state The normal AT state is initially set to end when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the initial ending difference number (for example, in this embodiment, 300 sheets in one set). There is. In the normal AT state, for each game, a number addition lottery process in which the number of coins is added to the initial ending difference number of coins, and a special zone lottery process to determine whether to move to the specialized zone are executed. When winning the number-addition lottery, the number determined in the number-addition lottery is added to the initial ending difference number of tickets. This added difference number is called the end difference number of additions. In the normal AT state, when the difference number reaches the initial end difference number or the additional end difference number, the normal AT state ends.
When the normal AT state ends, it moves to the pullback chance zone (see route R6 in FIG. 8(a)). Further, if the special zone lottery process is won in the normal AT state, the process moves to the special zone (see route R7 in FIG. 8(a)). The specialized zone is a gaming state that is advantageous for players who can easily add the number of coins, and the number of additional coins awarded in the specialized zone is added to the final difference number of coins. Further, when the difference in the number of sheets exceeds a predetermined threshold value (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment) in the normal AT state, the process shifts to the ending state (see path R8 in FIG. 8(a)).

FIG. 17(a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used for the accompanying lottery process) in the normal AT state, and the accompanying lottery process determines the accompanying character. This is a lottery process. The contents of the accompanying lottery table shown in FIG. 17(a) are the same as the contents of the accompanying lottery table in the advantageous section normal state, so the explanation will be omitted. That is, in this embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated even in the normal AT state. Note that the initial character accompanying state in the normal AT state is a non-accompanying state.

FIG. 17(b) shows a number addition selection table used in the number addition lottery process and a specialized zone lottery process (more specifically, a number addition selection table used in the number addition lottery process and a specialized zone lottery table used in the specialized zone lottery process. ) is a table schematically showing. The ticket number addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process are executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process, respectively. For example, in the lottery process to increase the number of tickets, in the case of a non-accompanied state, if a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, the number of tickets will be increased with a 1% chance of winning, and if a chance item or a strong cherry is internally won, the number of tickets will be increased by 10%. The number of tickets will be added based on the probability of winning. In addition, for example, in the lottery process to increase the number of tickets, if you are accompanied by an old man, if you win internally for a watermelon, the number of tickets will be increased with a 20% chance of winning, and if you win internally at the chance, the number of tickets will be increased with a 40% chance of winning. When a weak cherry wins internally, the number of tickets is added with a 1% chance of winning, and when a strong cherry wins internally, the number of tickets is added with a 10% chance of winning. It should be noted that the number of additional tickets awarded in the number-addition lottery process is a predetermined number (for example, 20 tickets, 50 tickets, etc.).

For example, in the specialized zone lottery process, in the case of a non-accompanied state, when a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, the system moves to the specialized zone with a 0.5% chance of winning, and a chance or strong cherry is internally won. When you do, you will move to the specialized zone with a 1% chance of winning. In addition, for example, in the specialized zone lottery process, if you are accompanied by a princess, if you win internally for a watermelon, you will move to the specialized zone with a 0.5% winning probability, and if you win internally on the chance, you will move to the specialized zone with a 1% probability of winning. If you move to the specialized zone with a winning probability and win internally to a weak cherry, you will move to the specialized zone with a 5% winning probability, and if you win internally to a strong cherry, you will move to the specialized zone with a 10% winning probability. do.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in this embodiment, the probability of increasing the number of tickets is higher in the accompanied state than in the non-accompanied state, and it is easier to move to the specialized zone. . In addition, in the internal lottery process for winning combinations in the accompanying state, if the corresponding character of the accompanying character is won, the probability of winning the number of additional prizes is higher than when winning other roles. It has become easy to migrate to. Note that even in the accompanied state, the probability of adding more cards is higher in the accompanied state of two characters than in the accompanied state of one character, and it is easier to move to the specialized zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the grandfather's corresponding role (Watermelon, chance) in the grandfather accompanying state and winning the number addition lottery process or the specialized zone lottery process, and the princess's corresponding role (in the princess accompanying state) The probabilities of winning (weak cherry, strong cherry) and winning the number addition lottery process or specialized zone lottery process are the same, but they are not the same, and if you win the corresponding role of the accompanying character in one accompanying state. may be treated more favorably than when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in other accompanying states.

- Pullback Chance Zone The pullback chance zone is a gaming state in which there is a possibility of returning to the normal AT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games in this embodiment). In the pullback chance zone, an AT pullback lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to return to the normal AT state. If you win in the AT pullback lottery process in a predetermined period, you will transition to the normal AT state (see route R6 in FIG. 8(a)), while if you do not win in the AT pullback lottery process in a predetermined period. The vehicle shifts to the non-advantageous section normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 8(a)). The AT pullback lottery may be determined, for example, based on the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. The pullback chance zone is a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed less frequently than in the normal AT state.

・Ending state When the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state exceeds the first threshold (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the normal AT state transitions to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 8(a)) ). The ending state is a gaming state in which the number of coins is not increased. Furthermore, when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the second threshold (for example, 2400 sheets in the case of this embodiment) in the ending state, the ending state is ended and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section normal state (Fig. 8 (See route R2 in (a)).

-Specialized Zone The specialized zone is a gaming state that consists of a predetermined gaming period (for example, 5 games in the case of this embodiment) and allows for easy addition of the number of coins. When an additional number of sheets is awarded in the specialized zone, the number of additional sheets provided is added to the final difference number of additional sheets. When all the games in the specialized zone have been played, a transition is made to the normal AT state (see route R7 in FIG. 8(a)). In the specialized zone, if you win an internally won push order bell and win an internally won push order bell, you will receive a number indicating the operation order (for details, a 3-digit number notified by the operation navigation. For example, push order bell_LCR In this case, the number of sheets in 123) becomes the additional number of sheets. In addition, in a game where the push order bell is internally won in the specialized zone, a freeze is generated before the operation navigation is generated to improve the player's sense of expectation. Freeze is a standby state that delays the reception timing of the next operation. During the freeze period, the reels 11 to 112 do not start rotating even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the reels 11 to 112 do not start rotating even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not accepted. The player's operations are not accepted, such as when there is no player. The performance during the freeze period is referred to as freeze performance. Note that the freeze time of this embodiment has a plurality of time patterns, and the number of additional sheets tends to increase as the freeze time becomes longer.

・Production of specialized zone The production of specialized zone will be explained below using FIGS. 18 to 20. In addition, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the upper row is a time chart showing the game progress of a predetermined game in the specialized zone, and the lower row is a state of the reels 110 to 112 and effect images at each time point in the upper time chart. 5 is a diagram showing an effect displayed on a display device 157. FIG.

FIG. 18 shows a game in which the push order bell_LCR was won in the specialized zone, the LCR operation was performed, the upper bell was won, and 123 additional coins were obtained. FIG. 18 shows a case where the reels 110 to 112 start based on a start lever operation (start operation) and freeze occurs, and the freeze ends after a predetermined time t1 has elapsed. In FIG. 18, time a-1 is the time of the start operation, time a-2 is the time during freezing after the start operation, time a-3 is the time when the operation navigation is started, and time a-4 is the time when the freeze ends. Time point a-5 is the start point at which operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, time a-5 is the start point at which operations on the cross button 191 can be accepted, and point a-6 is the point at which the first stop operation is performed. A-7 is the time point of the second stop operation, time a-8 is the time point of the third stop operation, and time a-9 is the time point when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 18, first, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating based on a start operation (see time a-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image display device 157 displays the following: An image of the prince looking disappointed is displayed (see point a-1 at the bottom). In other words, although the reels 110 to 112 are actually freezing, in addition to the reels 110 to 112 starting to rotate, an image of the player looking disappointed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, causing the player to freeze. You can mislead people into thinking that they have not done so. Next, at time point a-2 during the freeze, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, but the stop buttons 137 to 139, the production button 191, and the cross button 192 are in a state in which operation cannot be accepted (at the time point in the upper row). (See a-2). Therefore, during freezing, setting operations such as volume setting and light intensity setting are also impossible. Further, the effect image display device 157 displays an image indicating that the game is frozen and button operations are not possible (see time point a-2 in the lower row).

Next, at time a-3, the operation navigation starts even though it is frozen (see time a-3 in the upper row), and the image of the operation navigation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time a-3 in the lower row). -3)). In the game shown in FIG. 18, since the push order bell_LCR is won, specifically, the number 123 indicating the LCR operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

Next, at time point a-4 when the freeze ends, stop operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 become possible (see time point a-4 in the upper row), and when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point a-4 in the upper row). a-6), the left reel 110 stops, and the effect image display device 157 displays the image of the operation navigation after the first stop operation (see time a-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point a-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 139 (see time point a-8 in the upper row), and then a time point a-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time a-9 in the upper and lower rows), and a performance image indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time a-9 in the lower row). ). In the game shown in FIG. 18, specifically, 123 coins are added based on the number 123 notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 18, immediately after the start operation, the player mistakenly assumes that freezing has not occurred, and after that, by operating the operation means such as the stop button 138 (even if the operation is ), it is recognized that it is frozen. By doing this, it is possible to surprise the player, and it is also possible to improve the expectation that the bonus will be added. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is executed after freezing and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

FIG. 19 shows a game in which the player wins the push order bell_RLC in the specialized zone, performs the RLC operation, wins the lower bell, and obtains 231 additional coins. In FIG. 19, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 starts during a wait period, and after a predetermined time t2 (>predetermined time t1), the freeze ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The case where 112 starts rotating is shown. In addition, in FIG. 19, time point b-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point b-2 is the time point during freezing after the start operation and the start time point when it is possible to accept the operation for the production button 192, and time point b-3 is the time point b-3. After time b-2, the start point at which operation reception on the production button 192 becomes impossible, time b-4 is the point at which the freeze ends, and the time point when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the cross button 191 and the production button 192. Point b-5 is the start point at which operations can be accepted for the stop buttons 137 to 139, and point b-6 is the point at which the operation navigation is started. , time b-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time b-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time b-9 is the time of all the reels 110 to 112 being stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 19, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, the reels 110 to 112 become in a wait state (see time points b-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the first button operation promotion effect is executed. Then, the initial image d21 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The first button operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 192 (for example, an image of a meter and words such as "Collect the meter by pressing the button repeatedly!!" are displayed on the performance image display device 157). , is a performance that ends as time passes. Note that at time b-1, operation reception on the production button 192 is not possible (see time b-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time b-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation on the effect button 192 (see time point b-2 in the upper row), and when the effect button 192 is operated, the effect image display device 157 displays the first button. An image d22 of operation promotion effect is displayed (see time point b-2 in the lower row). The image d22 includes an image that promotes operation (for example, an image that urges button operation with words such as "Collect the meter by pressing the button repeatedly!!"), and an image that indicates an operation response (for example, an image that prompts button operation in response to the operation of the production button 192). It is configured to include an image in which the value of the meter increases) and an image showing the valid period of operation of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the time period during which the operation on the effect button 192 is valid).

Here, since the first button operation promotion performance is a performance that ends based on the passage of a predetermined time, the problem is that the player easily overlooks the performance compared to a performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time. There is. However, in this embodiment, since the first button operation promotion effect is executed during freezing, the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without the player overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. In addition to giving a special feeling, it is possible to liven up the game.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, Operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. can be done.

Next, at time b-3, when it becomes possible to accept the operation on the effect button 192 again (see time point b-3 in the upper row), the second button operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect image display device 157 displays the second button operation promotion effect. An image d23 of button operation promotion effect No. 2 is displayed (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The second button operation promotion effect is an operation promotion effect that urges the user to operate the effect button 192 again (for example, an image that urges the user to operate the effect button 192 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 together with a full meter image). The second button operation promotion performance is a performance that does not end due to the passage of time, and is a performance that ends when the performance button 192 is operated.

Next, at time point b-4, the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and it becomes impossible to accept the operation of the production button 192, and when the production button 192 is operated (the upper and lower rows) At the time b-4), the second button operation promotion effect is completed, and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see the time point b-4 in the lower row). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 19, an image showing an additional 231 coins is displayed based on the number 231 notified by the operation navigation that will be executed thereafter.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the operational validity period of the performance button 192, which is prompted to be operated by the second button operation promotion performance started in the frozen state, starts after the frozen state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (a first button operation promotion effect and a second button operation promotion effect) are started during a freeze, so the freeze state becomes long and the effects become redundant. There is a risk that it will become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect that is executed after the first button operation promotion effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the operation validity period of the effect button 192 that is the target of the operation is after the freeze ends. Trying to get started. This prevents the frozen state from becoming too long and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation promotion effect.

Next, at time b-5, when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the operation navigation is started (see time point b-5 in the upper row), the effect image display device 157 displays the image of the operation navigation. is displayed (see point b-5 in the bottom row). In the game shown in FIG. 19, since the push order bell_RLC is won, specifically, the number 231 indicating the RLC operation, which is the correct stopping operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-6 in the upper row), the right reel 112 stops, and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation. is displayed (see time point b-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point b-8 in the upper row), and then a time point b-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point b-9 in the upper row).

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 19, since the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of coins will be added in the game. Further, since the number of additional coins is notified after freezing and the operation navigation is executed thereafter, the player can understand the content of the correct stop operation from the notified number of additional coins. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

FIG. 20 shows a game in which the push order bell_RCL was won in the specialized zone, the RCL operation was performed, the lower bell was won, and 321 additional coins were obtained. In FIG. 20, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 starts during a wait period, and after a predetermined time t3 (>predetermined time t2), the freeze ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The case where 112 starts rotating is shown. In addition, in FIG. 20, time c-1 is the time of the start operation, time c-2 is the time of freezing after the start operation and the start time when operation reception for the production button 192 is possible, and time c-3 is the time of the start operation. This is after time c-2, which is the start point when operations on the production button 192 are no longer accepted, and the operation navigation starts, and time c-4 is the time when the freeze ends, and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. and the start point at which operations for the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, time c-5 is the start point at which operations for the cross button 191 can be accepted, time c-6 is the time for the first stop operation, Time c-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time c-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time c-9 is the time of all the reels 110 to 112 being stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 20, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 are in the waiting state (see time c-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image display device 157 shows the initial state. An image d31 (for example, an image of a confrontation between a lord and a samurai) is displayed (see time point c-1 in the lower row), and then the effect image display device 157 displays an image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect. Ru. The image d32 includes an image that encourages operation (for example, an image that urges button operation with the words "Decide with one blow!!"), and an image that indicates the operation validity period of the production button 192 (for example, an image that indicates that the operation of the production button 192 is not effective). (image of a gauge indicating the valid time). The first button operation promotion performance is an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 192, and is a performance that ends with the passage of time. It should be noted that at time c-1, it is not possible to accept operations on the production button 192 (see time c-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time c-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation on the production button 192 (see time c-2 in the upper row). The effect image display device 157 displays an image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect (see time point c-2 in the lower row).

Here, since the first button operation promotion performance is a performance that ends based on the passage of a predetermined time, the problem is that the player easily overlooks the performance compared to a performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time. There is. However, in this embodiment, since the first button operation promotion effect is executed during freezing, the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without the player overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. In addition to giving a special feeling, it is possible to liven up the game.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, Operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. can be done.

Next, at time c-3, when the effect button 192 becomes inoperable (see time point c-3 in the upper row), the operation navigation starts (see time point c-3 in the upper row), and the effect image display device 157 displays , the operation navigation image d11 is displayed (see point c-3 in the bottom row). In the game shown in FIG. 20, since the push order bell_RCL was won, specifically, the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In other words, the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 20 is a performance that is started during a freeze, and is also an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, so it can be said to be a second button operation promotion performance. This second button operation promotion performance (operation navigation) is a performance that does not end with the passage of time, and ends when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated.

Next, at time c-4, when the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and stop operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 become possible (see time c-4 in the upper and lower rows), and at time c-5. When this happens, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the cross button 191 (see time point c-5 in the upper row).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation validity period of the stop buttons 137 to 139, which are prompted to operate by the second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) started in the freeze state, starts after the freeze state ends. It looks like this. In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (a first button operation promotion effect and a second button operation promotion effect) are started during a freeze, so the freeze state becomes long and the effects become redundant. There is a risk that it will become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect that is executed after the first button operation promotion effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the operation validity period of the effect button 192 that is the target of the operation is after the freeze ends. Trying to get started. This prevents the frozen state from becoming too long and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation promotion effect.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 139, the right reel 112 stops (see time point c-6 in the upper row), and the effect image display device 157 displays the operation navigation image d11 after the first stop operation. is displayed (see point c-6 in the bottom row).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point c-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point c-8 in the upper row), and then a time point c-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time c-9 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see time point c-9 in the lower step). reference). In the game shown in FIG. 20, specifically, 321 coins are added based on the number 321 notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 20, since the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of coins will be increased in the game. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is executed after freezing and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

Note that the first button operation promotion effect explained with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20 is an effect that encourages an operation on the effect button 192, but regardless of whether or not the effect button 192 is operated or the number of times, a predetermined effect is performed. This is a performance that ends based on the passage of time. On the other hand, the second button operation promotion performance (operation navigation) described in FIGS. 19 and 20 is a performance that does not end based on the elapse of a predetermined time period. Therefore, the first button operation promotion performance has a special feeling compared to the second button operation promotion performance, and can improve interest in the game. However, there is a concern that the first button operation promotion effect that ends based on the passage of time is easily overlooked by the player, so in this embodiment, the first button operation promotion effect is executed during the freeze, and the first button operation promotion effect ends based on the passage of time. I am trying to draw attention to the 1st button operation promotion effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 18 to 20, the volume setting can be executed (the cross button 191 can be accepted) outside the freeze period, but the volume setting cannot be executed even during the game, such as while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. (The cross button 191 is not accepted), and the volume setting may be executed during non-gaming when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (the cross button 191 is accepted).

<Summary of Embodiment A>
(1) As described above, according to the game machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (e.g., embodiment A), the game proceeding means (e.g., main control unit 300) that proceeds with the game; A performance control means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) that executes a performance based on instructions from the game proceeding means, and operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a performance button 192, information display button 191, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.), and the game proceeding means is capable of generating a freeze state in which the progress of the game is put on hold (for example, in FIGS. 18 to 20). freeze), the effect control means may terminate the first operation promotion effect (for example, the first operation promotion effect shown in FIGS. 9(b-2) and 20(c-2)), which may be terminated based on the passage of a predetermined time. button operation promotion effect), and the first operation promotion effect may be started after the freeze state is started by the game proceeding means (for example, FIG. 19(b-2), FIG. 20(c-2)) is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, the first operation promotion effect is executed which may end based on the elapse of a predetermined time in the frozen state, so the first operation promotion effect is promoted without overlooking the first operation promotion effect. It is possible to draw attention to the performance and make the player feel special.

In the first basic configuration, a preferred configuration 1 is that the effect control means is a means for terminating the first operation promotion effect started in the frozen state in the frozen state.

According to preferred configuration 1, since the first operation promotion performance that starts in the frozen state ends in the freeze state, it is possible to draw attention to the first operation promotion performance without overlooking the first operation promotion performance, and the player can It can make you feel special.

In a first basic configuration, a preferred configuration 1, the operation means includes a first operation means (for example, a performance button 192, etc.) capable of changing the performance being executed based on the operation, In a preferred configuration 2, the first operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages operation of the first operation means.

According to the preferred configuration 2, it is possible to draw attention to the first operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, and it is possible to make the player feel special.

In the first basic configuration and preferred configurations 1 and 2, the performance control means is configured to control a second operation promotion performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time (for example, FIG. 19(b-3) , the second button operation promotion effect shown in FIG. In preferred configuration 3, the second operation promotion effect may be started later in the frozen state (for example, FIG. 19(b-3), FIG. 20(c-3)).

According to preferred configuration 3, since the second operation promotion performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time in the frozen state is executed, the second operation promotion performance can be executed without overlooking the second operation promotion performance. It can attract attention and make the player feel special.

In a preferred configuration 3, the second operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages operation of the first operation means (for example, FIG. 19(b-3)), which is a preferred configuration 4.

According to the preferred configuration 4, since two operation promotion effects that prompt the player to operate the same operation means are executed in succession, it is possible to improve expectations for the game.

In preferred configuration 3, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and a start operation means (for example, , a start lever 135), the operating means includes a second operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels, In preferred configuration 5, the second operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts a stop operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 20(c-3)).

According to preferred configuration 5, since two operation promotion effects that prompt the player to operate different operation means are executed in succession, it is possible to encourage the progress of the game and to improve expectations for the game.

(2) As described above, according to the game machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (e.g., embodiment A), the lottery means (e.g., , main control section 300, winning combination internal lottery process), gaming state transition means (for example, main control section 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the transition of gaming states, and production execution means (for example, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, effect image display device 157, etc.), wherein the gaming state transition means is configured to switch from a first period (for example, an advantageous section normal state) to a first period (for example, an advantageous section normal state). If the first transition condition is satisfied in the state of For example, when the first winning combination (for example, weak cherry or strong cherry) is won by the lottery means, the second state is a means for transitioning to the princess accompanying state). This is a more advantageous state than the first state when winning a winning role (for example, the CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)), and the performance execution means is configured to perform the second state in the first period. If the first role is won in the state, a first suggestion effect indicating that the first role has been won (for example, the corresponding role winning notification effect, image d3 in FIG. 12(b)) is displayed. On the other hand, if the first role is won in the first state of the first period, the first suggestion effect is not executed (for example, there is no image d3 in FIG. 12(a)). ), is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic structure, for a player who does not know that the second state is an advantageous state if he wins the first prize, he will be given the first prize if he wins the first prize. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the second state is an advantageous state if the first winning combination is won. Furthermore, for a player who knows that the second state is an advantageous state if he wins the first prize, the first suggestion performance is performed when he wins the first prize. By doing this, you can make sure you don't miss out on the fact that you won the first prize and make your heart flutter.

In the second basic configuration, the game state transition means is configured to perform a game state transition means when a second transition condition is satisfied in the first state of the first period (for example, if you win a watermelon or a chance prize, and If the player wins in the process, the player moves to the third state (e.g., grandpa accompanying state) as shown in FIG. The third state in this case is a more advantageous state than the first state in the case where the second winning combination is won by the lottery means (for example, the probability of winning CZ is high, as shown in FIG. 10(b)). , when the second role is won in the third state of the first period, the effect execution means executes a second suggestive effect (for example, , while executing the corresponding winning notification effect (image d5) of FIG. 13(a), if the second winning role is won in the first state of the first period, the second suggestion A preferred configuration 11 is that no performance is performed.

According to preferred configuration 11, for a player who does not know that the third state is an advantageous state if the second winning combination is won, the second suggestive performance is performed when the second winning combination is won. By executing this, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the third state is an advantageous state if the second winning combination is won. Furthermore, for a player who knows that the third state is an advantageous state if he wins the second prize, the second suggestive performance is performed when he wins the second prize. By doing this, you can make sure you don't miss the fact that you won the second prize and make your heart flutter.

In a preferred configuration 11, the game state transition means is configured to move when a third transition condition is satisfied in the second state of the first period (for example, when a watermelon or chance is won, and in the accompanying lottery process, In the case of winning, it is a means for moving to the fourth state (for example, grandfather & princess accompanying state) in FIG. 10(a)), and the fourth state is when the first prize is won by the lottery means. is a more advantageous state than the second state when the lottery means wins the first role (for example, CZ winning probability is high, FIG. 10(b)), and the production execution means If the first role is won in the fourth state of the first period, a third suggestive performance indicating that the first role has been won (for example, a corresponding role winning notification performance, A preferred configuration 12 is to execute images d3 and d5) in FIG. 13(a).

According to preferred configuration 12, for a player who does not know that the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state if the first winning combination is won, By executing the third suggestive performance, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the fourth state is an advantageous state if the first winning role is won. In addition, for players who know that the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state if they win the first prize, if they win the first prize, By performing the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player not miss the fact that he has won the first role and make him feel excited.

Note that the third condition may be the same as the second condition.

In preferred configuration 12, the first state is a state in which neither the first character image (for example, the princess image) nor the second character image (for example, the old man image) is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 9 ( a)), the second state is a state where the first character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 9(b)), and the third state is a state where the second character image is displayed. The fourth state is a state in which both the first character image and the second character image are displayed (for example, in FIG. 9(c)). d)), is a preferred configuration 13.

According to preferred configuration 13, the player can clearly judge each state during the first period based on the character image.

In a preferred configuration 12 or 13, the gaming state transition means is configured to control the gaming state transition means when the first falling condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, when the grandfather match ends lottery after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed). The gaming state shifting means is a means for shifting to the second state when a second falling condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, when the winning is guaranteed). (in the case of winning the princess accompaniment end lottery after the number of games has elapsed), the game state transition means is means for transitioning to the third state, and the game state transition means is a means for transitioning to the second state in the second state of the first period. When the falling condition is satisfied, the game state transition means moves to the first state; A preferred configuration 14 is a means for transitioning to the first state.

According to the preferred configuration 14, since the advantageous state may shift to the disadvantageous state, it is possible to provide the player with a more exciting, tense, and interesting game.

In preferred configurations 11, 12, 13, or 14, a second period (for example, CZ) different from the first period may be provided, and the second state may be in the second period. A preferred configuration 15 is that the third state may occur in the second period. According to preferred configuration 15, the game transitions to the second state or the third state even in the second period different from the first period, so that the player is provided with a variety of games and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, a third prize different from both the first prize and the second prize (for example, a push order bell) is provided, and the third prize is won by the lottery means during the second period. In the second state or the third state in which the first benefit is granted (for example, the winning probability of AT migration is increased), and the first benefit is granted by the lottery means during the first period, The second state when a prize is won or the third state when the second prize is won by the lottery means may be such that a second benefit is granted (for example, CZ (increases the probability of winning the transition).

According to this configuration, even if the conditions are the same, the conditions for awarding benefits and the benefits differ depending on the period, so it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances and games.

<Other game machines>
Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to the medals (hereinafter referred to as gaming media). (also referred to as value), the input of game value is performed using a predetermined external device (a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals, a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning), This includes inputting digitized data from an electronic storage device equipped with It is something that

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications may be made, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

<Explanation display according to the performance situation>
Next, an explanation display tailored to the production situation will be explained using FIGS. 21 to 23.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 1)>
FIGS. 21(a) to 21(h) are diagrams chronologically showing screen transitions in the explanation display (Example 1) tailored to the performance situation.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 1)/Transition to CZ state>
The state shown in FIG. 21(a) is a state in which the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state.

In the same state, since the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state, a state transition notification performance MP (in this example, At the same time, upon transition to the CZ state, an explanation display possible notification TC (in this example, a message indicating that a game explanation display can be displayed) is displayed. A character string is displayed, an image imitating the appearance of the production button 192 is displayed, and a character string "PUSH" is displayed.

<Explanatory display tailored to the performance situation (Example 1)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(b) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 21(a), and an explanation display regarding the CZ state is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, a certain operation by the operating means (for example, a performance When the button 192 is pressed (pressing operation of the button 192), an explanatory display regarding a certain performance state is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 21(b), when the production button 192 is pressed during the period (first period, 10 seconds in this example) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the CZ state (a certain production state). Since an operation (a certain operation by the operating means) has been performed, an explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state (an explanation display regarding a certain production state) is displayed.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. According to this example, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the player can understand more about the content of each performance state. It is possible to understand the game and increase the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. It is possible to improve convenience for players.

Note that "a certain performance state" according to the present invention is not limited to the "CZ state", but may include any performance state other than the CZ state (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.) ). Further, a certain performance state is not limited to one performance state, but may be a plurality of performance states to which the game machine can transition, or may be all performance states to which the game machine can transition.

Furthermore, the "first period" according to the present invention is not limited to the "period during which the explanatory display possible notification TC is executed" or the "predetermined time", but is, for example, a certain production state (for example, a CZ state). ) may be a period from when a predetermined number of games are completed, or from when a certain production state (for example, CZ state) is entered to a certain production state (for example, CZ state). ) may end, or may be a period from transitioning to a certain presentation state (for example, CZ state) to transitioning to another presentation state (for example, AT state). However, it may be a period from transition to a certain performance state (for example, CZ state) until an explanation display is displayed (until an operation is performed by the operation means).

Further, the trigger for starting the explanation display regarding the CZ state is not limited to the "pressing operation of the production button 192", but may also be started when an operation by another operating means is received, or when a certain production state The process may be started automatically (automatically) without any operation by the operating means.

Here, the explanatory display of the slot machine according to this example includes an explanatory display regarding benefits and transition conditions in each performance state, an explanatory display regarding the content of the performance in each performance state, an explanatory display regarding the story of the performance in each performance state, and an explanatory display regarding the performance story in each performance state. , an explanatory display regarding the characters appearing in the performance in each performance state, an explanatory display regarding the motif, etc.

Each explanation display is composed of one or more pages; in this example, the explanation display regarding the normal state is composed of multiple (4) pages, and the explanation display regarding the CZ state is composed of multiple (4) pages. ) consists of pages. Note that it goes without saying that the explanation display is not limited to a display composed of a plurality of pages.

In the example shown in FIG. 21(b), since the production button 192 was pressed in the CZ state, the explanation display regarding the CZ state is (1 page) CP1 is displayed.

In this example, the explanation display regarding the CZ state (1 page) CP1 is an explanation of the transition conditions from the CZ state to the AT state (in this example, "The more points you accumulate, the more chances you have! If you accumulate up to 500 points, you will enter AT!") Displaying the character string ).

Note that the content of the explanation display regarding the CZ state is not limited to this example, and may, for example, explain that "the CZ state is a gaming state in which the aim is to earn points in a predetermined period (20 games in this example)." It may be a display explaining that "the CZ state includes a princess accompanying state and an old man accompanying state", or it may be a display explaining that "CZ is the end of a predetermined period". Then, an AT lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21(b), in the display area on the right side of the explanation display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state, when a press operation of the right button (not shown) is received, the explanation display (1 page) regarding the CZ state is displayed. 2) is displayed (in this example, a character string "CZ(2) Explanation" and a rightward arrow are displayed).

When the right button press operation is received while the CZ state explanation display (1 page) CP1 is displayed, the CZ state explanation display (2 pages) is displayed, and the explanation about this CZ state is displayed. When the right button press operation is received while the display (page 2) is being displayed, the explanation display (page 3) regarding the CZ state is displayed, and the explanation display (page 3) regarding this CZ state is displayed. When the right button is pressed in the CZ state, an explanation display (page 4) regarding the CZ state is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21(b), in the display area on the left side of the CZ state explanation display (1 page) CP1, when the press operation of the left button (not shown) is received, the explanation display about the normal state (1 page) is displayed. A guidance display (in this example, a character string "Normal (4) Explanation" and a leftward arrow) is displayed to suggest that page 4) be displayed.

When the left button press operation is received while the explanatory display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed, the explanatory display (4 pages) regarding the normal state is displayed as shown in FIG. 21(c). ) Display NP4.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 1)/Press operation of left button>
The state shown in FIG. 21(c) is a state in which an explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is displayed.

In the same state, while the explanatory display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b) is being displayed, a press operation of the left button (not shown) is accepted, so the display shown in FIG. 21(c) As shown, an explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is displayed.

In this example, the explanation display regarding the normal state (page 4) NP4 is an explanation about the relationship between the character accompanying state in the normal state and the winning probability of the rare role (in this example, "Old man & princess accompanying state Grandpa & princess accompanying state , the winning probability has increased significantly for all rare roles.'').

According to this example, when the presentation state is set to the first presentation state (in this example, the CZ state), the first explanation display (in this example, the explanation display regarding the CZ state) is displayed. Even if there is a display, the second explanation display (in this example, the explanation display regarding the normal state) can be displayed by operating the operating means (in this example, the left button). , it is possible to check the explanatory display regarding the previously set performance state, prepare for and review the contents of the performance state, and provide the explanatory display required by the player. Player satisfaction and convenience can be increased.

Note that the content of the explanation display regarding the normal state (second explanation display) is not limited to this example, and for example, "In the normal state, a CZ shift lottery is to be performed to determine whether to shift to the CZ state." The display may be a display explaining that "the normal state includes a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an grandfather accompanying state, and a grandfather & princess accompanying state". Good too.

Note that the explanation display that can be displayed by pressing the left button (pressing the right button) is not limited to the explanation display regarding the normal state, but also other explanation displays (for example, the explanation display regarding the AT state, the explanation display regarding the story, etc.) It is also possible to display.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 1)/End of display of explanation display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(d) is a state in which the explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state has been erased (ended).

In the same state, the predetermined condition is satisfied while the explanatory display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is deleted (terminated), and only the state transition notification effect MP (display of the character string "CZ entry") is performed.

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 1)/Start of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(e) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed.

In the slot machine according to the present example, even if a certain operation (for example, pressing the effect button 192) is performed by the operating means during the second period of a certain effect state (for example, CZ state), the certain effect will not be executed. It is configured such that, without displaying an explanation display regarding the state (for example, an explanation display regarding the CZ state), a menu display is displayed when a certain operation is performed by the operating means in a second period of a certain performance state. .

In the state shown in FIG. 21(e), in the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC of the CZ state (a certain performance state) is completed, the performance button 192 is pressed (by the operation means). Since a certain operation) has been performed, the menu display MN is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the CZ state (an explanation display regarding a certain performance state).

If the player performs a certain operation by mistake after viewing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again, the player may feel troubled, but according to this example, By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, in the second period (in this example, the period after the display of the explanatory display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 21(a) is finished) of a certain performance state (in this example, the CZ state) When a certain operation is performed, a menu display (menu display MN in this example) is displayed. By displaying a menu display when a certain operation is performed in the game, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Note that even if the explanatory display regarding a certain performance state (for example, the explanatory display regarding the CZ state) is erased (terminated), the first period of the certain performance state (for example, when the explanation display possible notification TC is executed) If a certain operation (for example, pressing the effect button 192) by the operating means is performed again during the period (10 seconds) during which the effect is being performed (10 seconds), an explanation display regarding the certain effect state is displayed again. It may be configured as follows.

As shown in FIG. 21(e), in this example, the menu display MN includes a volume/light intensity setting button for transitioning to a volume/light intensity setting screen where the volume and light intensity of the presentation means can be set (adjusted); Displays a custom setting button for moving to a custom setting screen where the player can customize game content, a game explanation button for moving to an explanation display screen, and an exit button for ending the menu display. .

Then, after selecting any button in the menu display MN using the up and down buttons (not shown), by pressing the production button 192, in this example, the volume/light intensity setting screen, custom setting screen, and explanation display are displayed. It is possible to move to either of the above or exit the menu display MN.

According to this example, the menu display items include an item for displaying an explanation display (in this example, a game explanation button), and an item for making settings related to the game (in this example, a volume/light setting button, a custom setting button) ), even if a certain operation is performed and the explanation display is not displayed (second period), it is possible to display the explanation display via the menu display, and the game User convenience can be improved.

<Explanatory display tailored to the performance situation (Example 1)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(f) is a state in which the game explanation button in the menu display MN is selected, and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 21(g) is a state in which the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN. In this state, the production button 192 is pressed and an explanation display is displayed.

In this example, since the production button 192 is pressed while the game explanation button is selected on the menu display MN, the screen shifts to the explanation display screen, and the current production state ( In this example, an explanation display (in this example, an explanation display SP regarding the story of the performance executed by the game machine) that does not depend on the CZ state) is displayed.

Note that explanation displays that do not depend on the current performance state are not limited to "explanation displays regarding the story of the production executed by the game machine", but may also include, for example, explanation displays regarding characters appearing in various performances, explanation displays regarding motifs, etc. , an explanation display related to the operation of a game machine (for example, a tutorial display), an explanation display regarding business hours and events of a game parlor, an explanation display regarding a new machine, and the like may be an explanation display that is not related to the gameplay.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 21(g), in the display area on the right side of the explanation display SP regarding the story, when a press operation of the right button (not shown) is received, an explanation display (1 page) regarding the normal state is displayed. A guidance display (in this example, a character string "Normal (1) Explanation" and a rightward arrow) is displayed to suggest that the following is to be carried out.

If a right button press operation is received while the explanation display SP regarding the story is being displayed, an explanation display (one page) regarding the normal state is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of the story-related explanation display SP, a guidance display (in this example, "ED Display the string ``Explanation'' and an arrow pointing left).

Then, in a state where the explanation display SP regarding the story is being displayed, if a pressing operation of the left button is accepted, an explanation display regarding the ED is displayed.

According to this example, even if an explanation display that does not depend on the current performance state (in this example, an explanation display SP regarding the story of the performance executed by the game machine) is displayed, when the operating means is operated, a certain Since it is possible to display an explanation display (in this example, when the right button is pressed, an explanation display regarding the normal state can be displayed, and when the left button is pressed, an explanation display regarding the ED state can be displayed), so for example, it is possible to display an explanation display regarding the ED state when the right button is pressed. In addition to being able to check the explanatory display regarding the performance state that was previously set, it is possible to prepare for and review the contents of the performance state, and to provide the explanatory display that the player needs. , it is possible to increase player satisfaction and convenience.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 1)/End of explanation display display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(h) is a state in which the production button 192 has been pressed and the top screen of the menu display MN has returned.

In this example, when the production button 192 is pressed while the explanation display SP regarding the story shown in FIG. 21(g) is being displayed, the display returns to the top screen of the menu display MN and A setting button, a custom setting button, a game explanation button, and an end button are displayed.

Then, by selecting the end button using the up and down buttons (not shown) and then pressing the performance button 192, it is possible to end the menu display MN and return to the game screen.

In the example shown in FIGS. 21(a) to 21(d), the production button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC, and the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state and the explanation display NP4 regarding the normal state are displayed. An example was explained in which, after displaying, when the production button 192 is pressed while the explanation display NP4 is displayed, the display of the explanation display NP4 is erased (terminated) and the game screen returns to the game screen. .

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 21(e) to 21(h), when the game explanation button is selected in the menu display MN, the production button 192 is pressed, and an explanation about the story is displayed. After displaying the SP, the production button 192 is pressed while the explanation display SP is displayed, the screen returns to the top screen of the menu display MN, and after selecting the end button using the up and down buttons, the production is started. An example has been described in which pressing the button 192 ends the menu display MN and returns to the game screen.

In other words, the procedure for returning to the game screen after displaying the explanation display (method for erasing (terminating) the explanation display) is two different methods: displaying the explanation display via the menu display MN, and displaying the explanation display without going through the menu display MN. It differs depending on when an explanation display is displayed.

With this configuration, when displaying the explanation display, the player can operate the operation means after clearly recognizing whether or not the menu display has been used, thereby preventing the player from becoming confused during the operation. This can improve convenience for players.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 2)>
FIGS. 21(i) to 21(l) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, screen transitions in the explanation display (Example 2) tailored to the performance situation.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 2) / Execution of explanation display possible notification>
The state shown in FIG. 21(i) is a state in which a MAXBET operation is performed in the CZ state (princess accompanying state) and an explanation display possible notification TC is executed.

In the same state, in the display area of the effect image display device 157, a display notifying that the effect state is the CZ state (princess accompanying state) (in this example, a display of the character string "CZ~Princess accompanying~"), In addition to displaying character images including a princess), the MAX BET operation triggers an explanation display TC (in this example, displaying the character string "Game explanation" and displaying an image imitating the appearance of the production button 192). and displaying the character string "PUSH").

<Explanation display according to performance situation (Example 2)/End of notification that explanation can be displayed>
The state shown in FIG. 21(j) is a state in which the explanation display possible notification TC has been completed in a game in which the explanation display possible notification TC has been executed.

In the same state, when the start lever 135 is pressed, the operation navigation display is started, while the explanation display possibility notification TC is erased (ended).

The slot machine according to this example is configured to display an explanatory display regarding a certain performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operating means during a first period of a certain performance state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 21(i) to 21(j), the period (first period) in which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the CZ state (a certain performance state). Since the production button 192 has not been pressed (a certain operation by the operating means) during the period from when the CZ state is activated until the start lever 135 is pressed, an explanation display regarding the CZ state (a certain performance state (explanatory information) is not displayed.

Note that the "first period" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and includes, for example, one of a BET operation, a start lever operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation. It may be a period from when is performed until another operation is performed after that, or one of BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation. It may be a period from when an operation is performed until a certain amount of time has passed thereafter, or after a transition of the performance state or a change in the performance mode, etc., after which a certain operation of the operation means is performed. It may be a period until a certain amount of time has elapsed after there is a transition of the performance state or a change in the performance mode, etc.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 2)/Third stop operation>
The state shown in FIG. 21(k) is a state in which the third stop operation has been executed in the game in which the explanation display possible notification TC has been executed.

In the same state, the number of points earned in the game (55 points in this example) is displayed.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 2)/Start of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 21(l) is a state in which the presentation button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed in a state where the explanation display is not displayed.

In the slot machine according to the present example, a certain operation (for example, Even if a pressing operation of the production button 192) is performed, an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the CZ state) is not displayed, and a certain display by the operating means is performed during the second period of a certain production state. When an operation is performed, a menu display MN is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 21(l), in the period (second period) after the display of the CZ state (a certain performance state) explanation display possible notification TC is finished (second period), the performance button 192 is pressed (by the operation means). Since a certain operation) has been performed, the menu display MN is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the CZ state (an explanation display regarding a certain performance state).

If the player performs a certain operation by mistake after viewing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again, the player may feel troubled, but according to this example, By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, in the second period (in this example, the period after the display of the explanatory display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 21(i)) of a certain performance state (in this example, CZ state), a certain When a certain operation is performed, a menu display (menu display MN in this example) is displayed. By displaying a menu display when a certain operation is performed in the game, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 3)>
FIGS. 22(a) to 22(l) are diagrams chronologically showing screen transitions in an explanation display (Embodiment 3) tailored to the performance situation.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 3)/CZ state ends>
The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is a state in which the CZ state has ended and the normal state has been set as the production state.

In this state, since the CZ state has ended, a state transition notification effect (in this example, a character string "CZ end" is displayed) is performed to notify that the CZ state has ended.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 3) / Transition to normal state (non-accompanying state)>
The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (non-accompanying state).

In the same state, since the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (non-accompanying state), the state transition notification performance (in this example, " At the same time, upon transition to the normal state (unaccompanied state), an explanation display possible notification TC (in this example, display of the character string "Game explanation") and An image simulating the appearance of the button 192 and a character string "PUSH" are displayed.

<Explanatory display tailored to the production situation (Example 3)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(c), the production button 192 is pressed during the execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 22(b), and an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed. It is in a state of being.

In the slot machine according to the present example, in a first period (for example, a period in which an explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) of a certain performance state (for example, normal game (non-accompanying state)), a certain It is configured to display an explanation display regarding a certain production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state)) when an operation (for example, a pressing operation of the production button 192) is performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(c), during the period (first period, 10 seconds in this example) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the normal state (non-accompanied state) (certain production state), Since the performance button 192 has been pressed (a certain operation by the operating means), an explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) (an explanation display regarding a certain performance state) is displayed.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. According to this example, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the player can understand more about the content of each performance state. It is possible to understand the game and increase the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. It is possible to improve convenience for players.

Further, according to Examples 1 and 3, when the presentation state is set to the first presentation state (for example, the CZ state), when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operation means is operated ), a first explanation display regarding the first production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the CZ state) is displayed as an explanation display, and the production state is set to the second production state (for example, a normal state). In the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation means is operated), a second explanation display regarding the second production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the normal state) is displayed as the explanation display. In recent years, game machines have been performing a wide variety of presentations, and the presentations have become more complex. However, by displaying explanatory displays according to the presentation status, players can better understand the content of each presentation status. It is possible to increase the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect. Further, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and convenience for the player can be improved.

The explanation display regarding the normal state in this example is composed of multiple (four) pages, and in the example shown in FIG. 22(c), the production button 192 is pressed in the normal state (non-accompanied state). Therefore, among the explanation displays regarding the normal state composed of a plurality of (four) pages, an explanation display (one page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) is displayed.

In this example, the explanation display (one page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is an explanation of the transition conditions to the grandfather accompanying state or the princess accompanying state in the normal state (in this example, "Watermelon, I will accompany the grandfather on the chance"). Chance: Weak and strong cherries give you a chance to accompany the princess.''

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(c), in the display area on the right side of NP1 (page 1) explaining the normal state (unaccompanied state), when the right button (not shown) is pressed, Displays a guide (in this example, displays the character string "Normal (2) Explanation" and displays an arrow pointing to the right) suggesting that an explanation display (page 2) regarding the status (accompanied by the old man) will be displayed. .

Then, when the press operation of the right button is received while displaying the explanation display (1 page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state), the explanation display (2 pages) regarding the normal state (grandfather accompanying state) is received. ) is displayed and the explanation display (page 2) regarding this normal state (grandpa accompanying state) is displayed, and if the right button press operation is accepted, the explanation display regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed. (Page 3) is displayed, and when the explanation display (Page 3) regarding this normal state (Princess accompanying state) is displayed, if the right button press operation is accepted, the normal state (Princess and Grandfather accompanying state) is displayed. An explanation display (4 pages) regarding the status) is displayed.

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of NP1 (page 1) of explanation display regarding the normal state (unaccompanied state), when the press operation of the left button (not shown) is received, the explanation display regarding ST (stock time) is displayed. A guidance display (in this example, a character string "ST Explanation" and a leftward arrow) is displayed to suggest what to do.

Then, in a state where the explanation display (one page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed, if a press operation of the left button is received, an explanation display regarding ST is displayed.

According to this example, when the performance state is set to the first performance state (in this example, normal state (non-accompanied state)), the first explanation display (in this example, normal state (non-accompanied state)) Even if the explanation display regarding ST is displayed, the second explanation display (in this example, the explanation display regarding ST) can be displayed by operating the operating means (in this example, the left button). For example, it is possible to check the explanation display regarding the next performance state and the previously set performance state, and it is possible to prepare for and review the contents of the performance state, and also to provide necessary information to the player. Explanatory displays can be provided, increasing player satisfaction and convenience.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 3)/End of display of explanation display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(d) is a state in which the explanation display (one page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) has been erased (ended).

In the same state, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the state where the explanatory display (1 page) NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) shown in FIG. (has been performed), the display of the explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is erased (ended).

<Explanation display tailored to the production situation (Example 3)/Start of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(e) is a state in which the presentation button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed while the explanation display shown in FIG. 22(d) is erased (ended).

In the slot machine according to the present example, in a second period (for example, a period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC) of a certain production state (for example, a normal state (non-accompanying state)), a certain Even if an operation (for example, pressing the production button 192) is performed, an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state)) is not displayed, and the display does not display the explanation about the production state. When a certain operation is performed by the operating means during the second period, a menu display (for example, menu display MN) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(e), the production button 192 is pressed during the period (second period) after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC in the normal state (non-accompanying state) (a certain production state) is finished. Since an operation (a certain operation by the operating means) has been performed, the menu display MN is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state) (an explanation display regarding a certain performance state).

If the player performs a certain operation by mistake after viewing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again, the player may feel troubled, but according to this example, By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if an operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

In addition, a second period (in this example, a period after the display of the explanatory display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 22(b) is finished) of a certain production state (in this example, a normal state (non-accompanied state)) In order to display a menu display (menu display MN in this example) when a certain operation is performed using the operating means, a period (second period) is provided in which no explanation display is displayed even if a certain operation is performed. On the other hand, by displaying a menu display when a certain operation is performed during the period, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 3)/End of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 22(f) is a state in which the end button is selected in the menu display MN, and the state shown in FIG. 22(g) is a state in which the menu display MN is erased (end).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 22(f), after the end button is selected using the up and down buttons (not shown) while the top screen of the menu display MN is being displayed, the production button 192 is pressed. Since the operation has been performed, the menu display MN is erased (terminated) and the game screen is returned.

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 3)/Demo production>
The state shown in FIG. 22(h) is the state in which the demonstration performance has started, and the state shown in FIG. 22(i) is the state in which the demonstration performance has ended.

In this example, since the start condition for the demo effect was met on the normal screen (for example, no BET operation was performed for a predetermined period of time), the end condition for the demo effect was met after the demonstration effect was started (for example, Since the BET operation has been performed), the demonstration effect is ended and the game screen returns to the game screen. At the same time, the return of the game screen (the end of the demo effect) is used as an opportunity to notify that the game explanation display can be displayed. Displayable notification TC is being performed.

<Explanatory display tailored to the production situation (Example 3)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(j), the production button 192 is pressed during the execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 22(i), and an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) is displayed. It is in a state of being.

In the slot machine according to the present example, in a second period (for example, a period after finishing displaying the explanation displayable notification TC) in a certain performance state (for example, normal state (non-accompanying state)), Even if an operation (for example, pressing the production button 192) is performed, if a demonstration production is executed before a certain operation using the operation means, the menu display will not be displayed. , is configured to display an explanatory display regarding the certain performance state (for example, an explanatory display regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state)).

In the state shown in FIG. 22(j), when the production button 192 is pressed during the period (second period) after the display of the information TC that can be displayed in the normal state (non-accompanied state) (a certain production state) An operation (a certain operation by the operating means) was performed, but since a demonstration effect was executed before the certain operation by the operating means, the menu display was not displayed and the display was in the normal state (non-accompanied state). An explanatory display NP1 (an explanatory display regarding a certain performance state) is displayed.

According to this example, by executing the demonstration performance, the state in which the game explanation display can be displayed is restored without going through the menu display, so that it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 3)/Transition to normal state (Princess accompanying state)>
The state shown in FIG. 22(k) is a state in which the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (princess accompanying state).

In the same state, since the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the normal state (princess accompanying state), the state transition notification performance (in this example, " ●● Stage ~Princess Accompanying~''), and upon transition to the normal state (Princess Accompanying State), an explanation display possible notification TC is sent to notify that the game explanation display can be displayed. Is going.

<Explanatory display tailored to the production situation (Example 3)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
In the state shown in FIG. 22(l), the production button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 22(k), and an explanation display regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed. It is in a state of being.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a first period (for example, a period in which an explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) of a certain production state (for example, a normal state (princess accompanying state)), a certain It is configured to display an explanation display regarding a certain performance state (for example, an explanation display regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state)) when an operation (for example, a pressing operation of the performance button 192) is performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22(l), during the period (first period, 10 seconds in this example) during which the explanation display possible notification TC is executed in the normal state (princess accompanying state) (a certain performance state), Since the performance button 192 has been pressed (a certain operation by the operating means), an explanation display NP3 (an explanation display regarding a certain performance state) regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. According to this example, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the player can understand more about the content of each performance state. It is possible to understand the game and increase the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. It is possible to improve convenience for players.

The explanatory display regarding the normal state in this example is composed of multiple (four) pages, and in the example shown in FIG. 22(l), the production button 192 is pressed in the normal state (princess accompanying state). Therefore, among the explanatory displays regarding the normal state composed of a plurality of (four) pages, an explanatory display (3 pages) NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) is displayed.

In this example, an explanation display (page 3) regarding the normal state (Princess accompanying state) NP3 is an explanation of the Princess accompanying state in the normal state (In this example, "Princess accompanying state. In the Princess accompanying state, winnings are won with weak cherry and strong cherry. "Probability has increased significantly." is displayed).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 22(l), in the display area on the right side of NP3 (page 3) explaining the normal state (princess accompanying state), when a press operation of the right button (not shown) is received, A guide display suggesting that an explanation display (4 pages) regarding the status (old man and princess accompanying state) should be displayed (in this example, display of the character string "Normal (4) explanation" and display of an arrow pointing to the right) I do.

Then, when the press operation of the right button is received while displaying the explanation display (page 3) NP3 regarding the normal state (Princess accompanying state), the explanation display regarding the normal state (Princess & Grandpa accompanying state) ( 4 pages).

On the other hand, in the display area on the left side of NP3 (page 3), when a press operation of the left button (not shown) is received, an explanation about the normal state (accompanying grandfather state) is displayed. A guidance display (in this example, a character string "Normal (2) Explanation" and a leftward arrow) is displayed to suggest that the following is to be displayed.

Then, when the press operation of the left button is received while displaying NP3 (page 3) explaining the normal state (accompanying the princess state), an explanation display regarding the normal state (the state accompanying the grandfather) is displayed. .

According to this example, even if the performance state is the same (in this example, the same stage in the normal state), the explanation display differs depending on the operation timing of the operating means, so that when a player performs a certain operation using the operating means. Explanation displays that match the timing can be provided at the appropriate timing, and convenience for the player can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this example, when the presentation state is set to the first presentation state (e.g., normal state (non-accompanying state)), if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the operation of the operating means is performed) ), a first explanation display regarding the first production state (for example, an explanation display regarding the normal state (non-accompanied state)) is displayed as an explanation display, and the production state is changed to the second production state (for example, normal state (princess accompanying state) (normal state), when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operating means is operated), a second display related to the second performance state is displayed as the explanation display. In order to display explanatory displays (for example, explanatory displays regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state)), recent game machines perform a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. By displaying the display, the player can better understand the content of each performance state, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be increased. Further, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and convenience for the player can be improved.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 4)>
FIGS. 23(a) to 23(l) are diagrams showing, in chronological order, screen transitions in the explanation display (Embodiment 4) according to the production situation.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/Transition to CZ state>
The state shown in FIG. 23(a) is a state in which the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first period of a certain performance state (for example, CZ state) (for example, the period from the game in which a certain performance state (CZ state) is set until the next game is started) , when the first operation (for example, pressing the production button 192) by the operating means is performed, an explanation display (first explanation display) is displayed (or can be displayed), and in the first period. The first display regarding the explanation display (for example, the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 23(a)) is configured to be displayable.

In the state shown in FIG. 23(a), since the performance state in the advantageous section has shifted to the CZ state, a state transition notification performance is displayed in the display area of the performance image display device 157 to notify that the performance state has transitioned to the CZ state. MP (in this example, the character string "CZ entry" is displayed), and upon transition to the CZ state, an explanation display enable notification TC (a message regarding explanation display) is sent to notify that an explanation display can be displayed. 1. In this example, a character string "Game Explanation" is displayed, an image imitating the appearance of the production button 192, and a character string "PUSH" are displayed.

It is expected that the players who need the explanation display are those who are not familiar with the game machine, but by making it possible to display the explanation display possibility notification TC (first display), the player who is not familiar with the game machine Even the player can obtain information regarding the explanation display, thereby increasing the convenience for the player. Moreover, by making it possible to display the explanation display by performing the first operation based on the explanation display enable notification TC (first display), it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Note that the "first display" according to the present invention may be a "display related to explanation display" (a display that can notify that the explanation display can be displayed), for example, "explanation display by pressing a button". It may be a display of only a character string, a display that is displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) and then erased after the elapse of the predetermined time, or a display that is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. It may be a scroll display that moves from one side to the other, or it may be a display displayed on a display means (for example, a sub-liquid crystal or LED) different from the effect image display device 157.

Further, the condition for starting the display of the "first display" according to the present invention is not limited to "transition to a certain presentation state (CZ state)", but for example, the condition for starting the display of the "first display" is not limited to "transition to a certain presentation state (CZ state)", but for example, If one display has never been displayed, if no explanation display has been displayed after transitioning to a certain production state, if no game has been played for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) This may be the case (in which no operation was performed using the operating means), the demonstration performance has ended, or the case where a certain operating means was operated.

<Explanatory display tailored to the performance situation (Example 4)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(b) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed during execution of the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 23(a), and an explanation display regarding the CZ state is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first period of a certain performance state (for example, CZ state) (for example, the period from the game in which a certain performance state (CZ state) is set until the next game is started) is configured to display (or be capable of displaying) an explanation display (first explanation display) when the first operation (for example, pressing operation of the effect button 192) is performed by the operation means.

In the state shown in FIG. 23(b), during the period (first period) from the game in which the CZ state (a certain performance state) is set to the next game, the performance button 192 is pressed (operation means Since the first operation) has been performed, an explanation display CP1 (first explanation display) regarding the CZ state is displayed.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. According to this example, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the player can understand more about the content of each performance state. It is possible to understand the game and increase the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect. Furthermore, by displaying an explanatory display according to the performance state when the first operation using the operating means is performed, an explanatory display that matches the timing when the first operation using the operating means is performed by the player is displayed. The player's convenience can be improved. Further, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use both for players who are familiar with the game machine and for players who are not.

Although the display mode of the explanation display is not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. In the right display area, a guidance display (in this example, "CZ (2) The text string "Explanation" and an arrow pointing to the right are displayed.

When the right button press operation is received while the CZ state explanation display (1 page) CP1 is displayed, the CZ state explanation display (2 pages) is displayed, and the explanation about this CZ state is displayed. When the right button press operation is received while the display (page 2) is being displayed, the explanation display (page 3) regarding the CZ state is displayed, and the explanation display (page 3) regarding this CZ state is displayed. When the right button is pressed in the CZ state, an explanation display (page 4) regarding the CZ state is displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23(b), in the display area on the left side of the CZ state explanation display (1 page) CP1, when the press operation of the left button (not shown) is received, the explanation display about the normal state (1 page) is displayed. A guidance display (in this example, a character string "Normal (4) Explanation" and a leftward arrow) is displayed to suggest that page 4) be displayed.

When the left button press operation is received while the explanation display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed, the explanation display (4 pages) regarding the normal state is displayed as shown in FIG. 23(c). ) Display NP4.

In addition, the "first period (of a certain state)" according to the present invention means "a period from a game in which a certain production state (CZ state) is set (transitioned to) to a next game set (transitioned to)". For example, the period from when a certain production state is set until the explanation display (first explanation display) is displayed once, from when the explanation display possibility notification TC starts to when it ends. The period from transitioning to a certain performance state until the completion of a plurality of predetermined games; The period from transitioning to a certain performance state until the end of the certain performance state; The period from transitioning to a performance state until transition to another performance state, the period from transitioning to a certain performance state until an explanation display is displayed (until an operation is performed by the operating means), BET operation, During the period from when one of the start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation is performed until the other operation is performed, the BET operation, start lever operation, and the third stop operation are performed. During the period from when one of the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation is performed until a certain amount of time has elapsed, there may be a transition in the performance state or a change in the performance mode, etc. It may be a period from the time until a certain operation of the operating means is performed thereafter, or a period from when there is a transition of the performance state or a change in the performance mode until a certain time has passed thereafter.

Furthermore, the "first operation" according to the present invention is not limited to "the operation of pressing the production button 192", but may also include other operation means (for example, any one of the cross key buttons 191a or the OK button 191b). The operation may be an operation using a touch panel, an operation using a touch panel, or an operation using a plurality of operation means (for example, an operation of pressing the production button 192 after pressing any one of the cross key buttons 191a). However, it may be a long press operation of a certain operation means, a continuous press operation of a certain operation means, or the like.

Furthermore, the "first explanation display" according to the present invention is not limited to an explanation display regarding a certain performance state (in this example, the CZ state), but, for example, the "first explanation display" is not limited to an explanation display regarding a certain performance state (in this example, the CZ state). It may be an explanation about the state, an explanation display about the winning combination, an explanation about the symbols on the reels, an explanation about the gaming state, an explanation about the gaming method, a tutorial, or the like.

Furthermore, when the "first explanatory display" according to the present invention is composed of a plurality of displays, the operation means that can switch between the plurality of displays is not limited to the left button or the right button, but for example, other operation means. (For example, any one of the cross key buttons 191a or the OK button 191b), a touch panel, etc. may be used.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/Press operation of left button>
The state shown in FIG. 23(c) is a state in which an explanation display (four pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is displayed.

In the same state, when the explanatory display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in Fig. 23(b) is displayed, a press operation of the left button (not shown) is accepted, so the display shown in Fig. 23(c) As shown, an explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is displayed.

In this example, the explanation display regarding the normal state (page 4) NP4 is an explanation about the relationship between the character accompanying state in the normal state and the winning probability of the rare role (in this example, "Old man & princess accompanying state Grandpa & princess accompanying state , the winning probability has increased significantly for all rare roles.'').

According to this example, when the presentation state is set to the first presentation state (in this example, the CZ state), the explanation display of the first presentation state (in this example, the explanation display regarding the CZ state) is Even if it is displayed, if you operate the operating means (in this example, the left button), it is possible to display the explanation display of the second performance state (in this example, the explanation display regarding the normal state), so for example, the following It is possible to check the explanatory display regarding the performance state to be transitioned to and the performance state that was previously set, and not only allows players to prepare for and review the contents of the performance state, but also to display the explanatory display required by the player. This can increase player satisfaction and convenience.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/End of explanation display display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(d) is a state in which the explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state has been erased (ended).

In the same state, the predetermined condition is satisfied while the explanatory display (page 4) NP4 regarding the normal state shown in FIG. 23(c) is displayed (in this example, the production button 192 was pressed) Therefore, the explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state is deleted (terminated), and only the state transition notification effect MP (display of the character string "CZ entry") is performed.

In addition, in this example, since the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed once in the state shown in FIG. 23(b), the explanation display possible notification TC displayed in the state shown in FIG. 23(a) is hidden (configured not to display).

The explanation display possibility notification TC (first display) may be a troublesome display for players who are familiar with this game machine, but it is possible to display it until a certain condition is met after erasing the explanation display (for example, , until the demonstration effect shown in FIG. 23(h) ends), the information TC (first display) that can be displayed for explanation is not displayed, thereby improving convenience for players who are not familiar with this game machine. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of players who are familiar with the game machine.

<Explanatory display tailored to the performance situation (Example 4)/Start of displaying the explanatory display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(e) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed while the explanation display possible notification TC shown in FIG. 23(d) is not displayed, and an explanation display regarding the CZ state is displayed. be.

In the slot machine according to this example, the first period of a certain performance state (for example, CZ state) (for example, the period from the game in which a certain performance state (CZ state) is set until the next game is started) , when the first operation by the operating means (for example, pressing the production button 192) is performed, an explanation display possible notification TC (first display) is performed to notify that the explanation display can be displayed. Even if the explanation display (first explanation display) is not displayed, the explanation display (or the first explanation display) is configured to be displayed (or capable of being displayed).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(d), the explanatory display possible notification TC described using FIG. During the period until the transition (first period), since the pressing operation of the production button 192 (first operation by the operating means) was performed, an explanation display CP1 (first explanation display) regarding the CZ state is displayed. are doing.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 23(c), the explanation display (4 pages) NP4 regarding the normal state was displayed last as an explanation display, but at the timing shown in FIG. 23(e), regarding the last displayed normal game Without displaying an explanation display (without displaying a continuation of the explanation display), the explanation display (one page) CP1 regarding the current performance state (in this example, the CZ state) is displayed first. Note that the explanation display may start from the last explanation display (in this example, the explanation display regarding the normal game) in the most recent explanation display.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/End of explanation display display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(f) is a state in which the explanation display (one page) CP1 regarding the CZ state has been erased (completed).

In the same state, a predetermined condition is satisfied while the explanatory display (1 page) CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation display (one page) CP1 regarding the CZ state is erased (terminated), and the state transition notification effect MP (display of the character string "CZ entry") is restarted.

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 4)/Start of demonstration production>
The state shown in FIG. 23(g) is a state in which the demonstration performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) has started.

In this state, the demonstration effect is started when no game is played (no operation is performed by the operating means) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).

Although the form of the demonstration performance is not particularly limited, in this example, the state transition notification performance MP is deleted and a demonstration performance notification that informs that the demonstration performance is being executed (in this example, the character string "Demonstration in progress") is sent. display).

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 4)/Start of demonstration production>
The state shown in FIG. 23(h) is the state in which the demonstration performance has ended.

In the same state, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the demonstration performance (in this example, the performance button 192 is pressed), the demonstration performance ends, and the end of the demonstration performance triggers the 23(a) is redisplayed.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 23(d), even if the production button 192 is pressed, the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state may not be displayed. That is, the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state may be displayed only when the production button 192 is pressed while the explanation display possibility notification TC is being displayed. Even in this case, after the demonstration performance is executed, the explanation display possible notification TC is displayed as in FIG. 23(h), and when the production button 192 is pressed, the explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state is displayed. All you have to do is display it.

Further, the opportunity to redisplay the explanation display possibility notification TC may be not the execution of a demonstration performance, but a case where no game or operation of the operation means such as the performance button 192 is performed for a certain period of time.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/Several games after CZ state is set>
The state shown in FIG. 23(i) is a state in which several games have been played starting from the game in which the CZ state shown in FIG. 23(a) is set.

In the same state, the CZ state continues, and a CZ state effect including a game state display indicating the CZ state (in this example, a display of the character string "CZ~Princess Accompanying~") is executed. However, since several games have passed since the CZ state was set (the period (first period) has elapsed from the game in which the CZ state was set to the next game), The explanation display possible notification TC that was displayed at the timing shown in 23(a) is not displayed.

<Explanatory display according to the performance situation (Example 4)/Start of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(j) is a state in which the production button 192 is pressed and the menu display MN is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, the second period of a certain performance state (for example, CZ state) (for example, the period until the end of the CZ state after the game in which the CZ state is set, The first operation (for example, the pressing operation of the production button 192) by the operation means is performed during the period in which no game is played in the game in which the When the menu is displayed, the menu display is configured to be displayed (or can be displayed) without displaying the first explanation display (for example, the explanation display regarding the CZ state).

In the state shown in FIG. 23(i), the production button 192 is pressed during the period (second period) until the end of the CZ state after the game in which the CZ state (a certain production state) is set. Since the operation (first operation by the operating means) has been performed, the menu display MN is displayed without displaying the explanation display (first explanation display) regarding the CZ state.

If the player accidentally performs the first operation after viewing the explanation display, if the explanation display is displayed again, the player may feel troubled, but according to this example, By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Note that the condition for starting the display of the "menu display" according to the present invention is that the second period of a certain performance state (CZ state) (the CZ state after the game in which the CZ state is set ends) This is not limited to the first operation (pressing the production button 192) performed by the operating means during the period of , a case where an operation is performed by an operating means, a case where an operating means dedicated to displaying a menu is operated during a second period of a certain performance state, etc.

Further, as explained using FIGS. 21(f) and (g), in the menu display MN, after the game explanation button is selected by the left and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a, the production button 192 is pressed (the first When the second operation) is performed, the screen moves to the explanation display screen, and on this explanation display screen, an explanation display (second explanation display, in this example) that does not depend on the current performance state (in this example, the CZ state) is performed. , an explanation display SP) regarding the story of the performance executed by the game machine is displayed.

The explanation display CP1 (first explanation display) explained using FIGS. 23(b) and 23(e) is an explanation about a certain performance state (in this example, In contrast, the explanation display SP (second explanation display) explained using FIG. 21(g) is a display that displays a This is a display that displays explanation content (in this example, an explanation regarding the story of the performance executed by the game machine) that is different from the explanation content regarding a certain performance state (in this example, the explanation regarding the CZ state).

That is, the explanation content (in this example, explanation regarding the CZ state) when the explanation display CP1 (first explanation display) shown in FIG. 23(b) or FIG. 23(e) starts to be displayed, and The content of the explanation (in this example, the explanation regarding the story of the performance performed by the gaming machine) is different from the content of the explanation displayed at the time when the display of the explanation display SP (second explanation display) shown in g) is started.

According to this example, the explanation display starts when displaying an explanation display that does not go through the menu display (first explanation display) and when displaying an explanation display that goes through the menu display (second explanation display). Since the content of the explanation when the game is played can be varied, it is possible for the player to select the explanation display that he/she desires by his/her own operation, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction and convenience.

In addition, when displaying an explanation display that does not go through the menu display (first explanation display), by displaying an explanation according to the current performance state, it is possible to confirm the explanation that matches the current situation, and the player Not only can the convenience of the game be improved, but also the player can better understand the content of each performance state, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be increased.

On the other hand, when displaying an explanation display via the menu display (second explanation display), it is highly likely that the player has already checked the explanation corresponding to the current production state, and Since there is a high possibility that the player wants to check an explanation that does not correspond to the explanation according to the current performance state, by displaying an explanation display that is different from the explanation according to the current performance state, it is possible to display a display that matches the player's wishes, and the game User convenience and satisfaction can be improved.

<Explanation display according to production situation (Example 4)/End of menu display>
The state shown in FIG. 23(k) is a state in which the menu display MN has been erased (ended).

In the same state, the predetermined condition is satisfied while the menu display MN shown in FIG. has been carried out), the menu display MN is erased (ended) and the CZ state including the game state display indicating the CZ state (in this example, the display of the character string "CZ~Princess Accompanying~") is displayed. The production has resumed.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, in this example, the demonstration effect is started when no operation is performed using the operating means for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) in the same state.

<Explanatory display according to the production situation (Example 4)/Start of demonstration production>
The state shown in FIG. 23(l) is the state in which the demonstration performance has ended.

In this state, during the demonstration performance that started after the CZ state shown in FIG. The performance has ended.

Further, in the same state, since the demonstration performance has ended, the explanation display possible notification TC described using FIG. 23(a) is displayed.

Then, when the presentation button 192 is pressed (the first operation by the operation means) while this explanation display possible notification TC is displayed, the state similar to the state shown in FIG. 23(b) is performed. , displays an explanation display CP1 (first explanation display) regarding the CZ state.

According to this example, if the previous player stopped playing midway through the game, an explanation display can be provided at an appropriate time even to the player who resumes playing the game midway through, thereby improving the player's satisfaction level. Convenience can be improved.

<Explanatory display/summary according to the performance situation>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a setting means (for example, a game state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states. ) and an operation means (for example, a performance button 192), the plurality of performance states include a certain performance state (for example, a normal state, a CZ state, an AT state, a bonus, an ED state, specialized zone, etc.), and the first period of the certain production state (for example, the period when the explanation display possible notification TC is being executed, the predetermined plurality of The period until the game is played, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until the end of the certain presentation state, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until the transition to another presentation state, or During the period from the transition to the production state until the explanation display is displayed (until the operation is performed by the operation means), the BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation during the period from when one of these operations is performed until the other operation is performed after that. The period from when the performance is performed until a certain amount of time has elapsed, from when there is a transition of the performance state or a change in the performance mode, etc. until a certain operation of the operating means is performed after that, the performance state When a certain operation is performed by the operating means during the period from when there is a transition or a change in the performance mode, etc. until a certain period of time has passed thereafter, an explanatory display regarding the certain performance state (for example, a diagram Explanatory display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b), explanatory display NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(c), explanatory display NP3 regarding the normal state (princess accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(l) ) is a game machine characterized by displaying a.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance status, players can understand each performance. The content of the state can be better understood, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be increased. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. It is possible to improve convenience for players.

Furthermore, even if the certain operation is performed by the operating means during the second period of the certain presentation state (for example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished), the information regarding the certain presentation state The explanation display may not be displayed.

If a player accidentally performs a certain operation after viewing the explanation display, the explanation display may be displayed again, which may cause the player to feel troubled. By providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, when the certain operation is performed by the operating means in the second period of the certain performance state, a menu display (for example, menu display MN shown in FIG. 21(e)) is displayed. Good too.

With such a configuration, there is a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, while a menu display is displayed when a certain operation is performed during that period. By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience for players.

In other words, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states. The gaming machine is equipped with a first performance state (for example, CZ state) and a plurality of performance states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.). A second performance state (for example, a normal state) is included, an explanation display can be displayed in the first performance state and the second performance state, and the performance state is set to the first performance state. In the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation means is operated and the state shifts to a new performance state set by the setting means), the first performance state related to the first performance state is displayed as the explanation display. When one explanation display (for example, explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b)) is displayed and the production state is set to the second production state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, As the explanation display, a second explanation display regarding the second production state (for example, explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(c)) is displayed, and the second explanation display of the certain production state is displayed. When the certain operation is performed by the operating means during the period (for example, the period after the display of the explanation display possible notification TC is finished), the menu display ( For example, it is a gaming machine characterized by displaying a menu display MN) shown in FIG. 21(e).

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance status, players can understand each performance. The content of the state can be better understood, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be increased. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. This increases the convenience for players. Furthermore, if the player accidentally performs a certain operation after viewing the explanation display, the explanation display may be displayed again, which may be annoying to the player. Then, by providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, it is possible to improve convenience for the player. In addition, while providing a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even if a certain operation is performed, by displaying the menu display when a certain operation is performed during that period, the player's Convenience can be improved.

In addition, the menu display items include an item for displaying the explanation display (for example, a game explanation button to move to the explanation display screen) and an item for displaying setting displays related to the game (for example, the volume of the presentation means, etc.). Includes a volume/light intensity setting button to move to the volume/light intensity setting screen where the light intensity can be set (adjusted), and a custom setting button to move to the custom setting screen where the player can customize the game content. It may be something.

With such a configuration, even if there is a period (second period) in which the explanation display is not displayed even when a certain operation is performed, it is possible to display the explanation display by going through the menu display. , it is possible to improve convenience for players.

Further, the second period may be a period after the first period of the certain performance state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states, and an operation means (for example, a performance button 192, any of the up, down, left, and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a, an OK button 191b, a touch panel), and the plurality of performance states include a certain performance. A state (for example, a normal state, a CZ state, an AT state, a bonus, an ED state, a specialized zone, etc.) is included, and a first period of the certain performance state (for example, a certain performance state (CZ state) is set) When the first operation (for example, pressing the production button 192) by the operation means is performed during the period from the game played to the next game), an explanation display (hereinafter referred to as "first explanation display") is performed by the operation means. For example, an explanatory display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIGS. When the first operation is performed by the operation means in the game (integer)+first game or later), the menu display (for example, the menu display MN shown in FIG. 23(j)) is displayed without displaying the first explanation display. ) is displayed, and while the menu display is displayed, a second operation by the operation means (for example, a pressing operation of the production button 192 after the game explanation button is selected by the left and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a) is performed. When the first explanation display is started, an explanation display (hereinafter referred to as "second explanation display"; for example, the explanation display SP shown in FIG. 21(g)) is displayed, and the explanation content when the display of the first explanation display is started is displayed. (In this example, the explanation regarding the CZ state) is different from the explanation content when the display of the second explanation display starts (In this example, the explanation regarding the story of the performance executed by the gaming machine). It is a game machine that is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, there are two cases: when displaying an explanation display that does not go through the menu display (first explanation display) and when displaying an explanation display that goes through the menu display (second explanation display). , since the explanation content when the explanation display starts can be varied, it is possible for the player to select the explanation display he/she desires by his/her own operation, increasing player satisfaction and convenience. be able to.

Further, the first explanation display may be a display that displays explanation content regarding the certain performance state when display of the first explanation display is started.

With such a configuration, when displaying an explanation display that does not go through the menu display (first explanation display), it is possible to check the explanation according to the current situation by displaying an explanation according to the current performance state. This not only improves the player's convenience, but also allows the player to better understand the content of each performance state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game and the performance effect.

Further, the second explanation display may be a display that displays explanation content different from the explanation content regarding the certain production state when display of the second explanation display is started.

With such a configuration, when displaying an explanation display via the menu display (second explanation display), there is a possibility that the player has already checked the explanation according to the current performance state. Therefore, by displaying an explanation display that is different from the explanation corresponding to the current performance state, it is possible to display a display that matches the player's wishes. This can increase the convenience and satisfaction of players.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states, and an operation means (for example, a performance button 192, any of the up, down, left, and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a, an OK button 191b, a touch panel), and the plurality of performance states include a certain performance. states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.), and the first period of the certain production state (for example, when an explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) period, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until playing a predetermined number of games, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until the end of the certain presentation state, the period from entering a certain presentation state to the end of the certain presentation state, The period from the transition to another performance state, the period from the transition to a certain performance state until the explanation display is displayed (until the operation by the operating means is performed), BET operation, start lever operation , the period from when one of the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation is performed until the other operation is performed after that, BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation , the period from when one of the second stop operation and the third stop operation is performed until a certain amount of time has passed since then, after there is a transition of the production state or a change in the production mode, etc. A certain operation by the operating means (a period until a certain operation is performed on the operating means in For example, when a pressing operation of the production button 192 is performed, an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, an explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b), a normal state (non-function) shown in FIG. 22(c) An explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (accompanying state) shown in FIG. is performed, a menu display (for example, menu display MN shown in FIG. 23(j)) is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the certain production state, and the first period regarding the explanation display is displayed. 23(a), 23(h), and 23(l), which informs that the explanation display is available for display). This is a game machine that features:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by displaying an explanatory display according to the performance state, the player can better understand the content of each performance state, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be improved. can be increased. Furthermore, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state when a certain operation is performed by the operation means, an explanation display that matches the timing when a certain operation is performed by the player using the operation means is provided. It is possible to improve convenience for players. Furthermore, although it is expected that the players who require the explanation display are those who are not familiar with the game machine, by making it possible to display the first display related to the explanation display during the first period, the game machine Even a player who is not familiar with the game can obtain information regarding the explanatory display from the first display, thereby increasing convenience for the player.
Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states, and an operation means (for example, a performance button 192, any of the up, down, left, and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a, an OK button 191b, a touch panel), and the plurality of performance states include a certain performance. states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.), and the first period of the certain production state (for example, when an explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) period, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until playing a predetermined number of games, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until the end of the certain presentation state, the period from entering a certain presentation state to the end of the certain presentation state, The period from the transition to another performance state, the period from the transition to a certain performance state until the explanation display is displayed (until the operation by the operating means is performed), BET operation, start lever operation , the period from when one of the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation is performed until the other operation is performed after that, BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation , the period from when one of the second stop operation and the third stop operation is performed until a certain amount of time has passed since then, after there is a transition of the production state or a change in the production mode, etc. A certain operation by the operating means (a period until a certain operation is performed on the operating means in For example, when a pressing operation of the production button 192 is performed, an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, an explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b), a normal state (non-function) shown in FIG. 22(c) An explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (accompanying state) shown in FIG. is performed, a menu display (for example, menu display MN shown in FIG. 23(j)) is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the certain production state, and the first period regarding the explanation display is displayed. 23(a), 23(h), and 23(l), which informs that the explanation display can be displayed, and the above-mentioned During the first period after the display of the explanation display is finished, the first display is not displayed, and the certain operation by the operating means is performed during the first period when the first display is not displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the explanatory display is performed, the explanatory display is displayed, and the first display is a display that notifies that the explanatory display can be displayed.
Further, even if a demonstration effect is executed during the first period in which the first display is not displayed, and the first display is displayed in a certain period after the demonstration effect ends, the first display may be displayed. good.

Further, the first display may be a display notifying that the explanation display will be displayed by performing the certain operation using the operation means.

Although it is expected that the player who requires the explanation display is a player who is not familiar with this game machine, it is possible to display the first display informing that the explanation display can be displayed by performing a certain operation. By doing so, even a player who is not familiar with the game machine can easily display an explanatory display, and the convenience for the player can be improved.

Further, the first display can be displayed before the certain operation is performed by the operating means in the first period, but after the explanatory display is erased in the first period, the first display can be displayed. The first display is displayed until a condition is met (for example, until the demonstration performance shown in FIG. 23(h) ends, until a predetermined time has elapsed after an explanation display has been performed, or until the gaming state changes). may not be displayed.

The first display may be a nuisance for players who are familiar with this game machine, but it is recommended that the first display not be displayed until a certain condition is met after the explanatory display is cleared. By doing so, it is possible to improve the convenience for players who are not familiar with the game machine, while reducing the annoyance for players who are familiar with the game machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states, and an operation means (for example, a performance button 192, any of the up, down, left, and right arrow keys of the cross key button 191a, an OK button 191b, a touch panel), and the plurality of performance states include a certain performance. states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.), and the first period of the certain production state (for example, when an explanation display possible notification TC is being executed) period, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until playing a predetermined number of games, the period from transitioning to a certain presentation state until the end of the certain presentation state, the period from entering a certain presentation state to the end of the certain presentation state, The period from the transition to another performance state, the period from the transition to a certain performance state until the explanation display is displayed (until the operation by the operating means is performed), BET operation, start lever operation , the period from when one of the first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation is performed until the other operation is performed after that, BET operation, start lever operation, first stop operation , the period from when one of the second stop operation and the third stop operation is performed until a certain amount of time has passed since then, after there is a transition of the production state or a change in the production mode, etc. A certain operation by the operating means (a period until a certain operation is performed on the operating means in For example, when a pressing operation of the production button 192 is performed, an explanation display regarding the certain production state (for example, an explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b), a normal state (non-function) shown in FIG. 22(c) An explanation display NP1 regarding the normal state (accompanying state) shown in FIG. is performed, a menu display (for example, menu display MN shown in FIGS. 21(e) and 23(j)) is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the certain performance state, and the items on the menu display are displayed. includes items that can display the explanation display (for example, a game explanation button to move to the explanation display screen) and items that display setting displays related to the game (for example, settings (adjustments) for the volume and light intensity of the production means). A volume/light intensity setting button for moving to a volume/light intensity setting screen where players can customize the game content, and a custom setting button for moving to a custom setting screen where the player can customize the game content. It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by displaying an explanatory display according to the performance state, the player can better understand the content of each performance state, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be improved. can be increased. In addition, if the explanation display is always displayed during the period, the menu cannot be displayed easily, which may impair convenience, but it is possible to set a period in which the explanation display is not displayed in the first operation, and then display the menu Convenience can be improved by making it easier to display. Further, even during a period in which the explanation display is not displayed in the first operation, the explanation display can be displayed by going through the menu, so it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is equipped with a setting means (for example, a gaming state control process) that can set one performance state among a plurality of performance states. The gaming machine is a gaming machine, and the plurality of performance states (for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, bonus, ED state, specialized zone, etc.) include a first performance state (for example, CZ state) and a second performance state. a presentation state (for example, a normal state), an explanatory display can be displayed in the first presentation state and the second presentation state, and the presentation state is set to the first presentation state. In the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the operation means is operated and the state shifts to a new performance state set by the setting means), the first performance state related to the first performance state is displayed as the explanation display. When an explanation display (for example, explanation display CP1 regarding the CZ state shown in FIG. 21(b)) is displayed and the production state is set to the second production state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the explanation This gaming machine is characterized in that a second explanatory display regarding the second performance state (for example, an explanatory display NP1 regarding the normal state (non-accompanying state) shown in FIG. 22(c)) is displayed as a display.

In recent years, game machines have performed a wide variety of performances, and the performances have become more complex. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance status, players can understand each performance. The content of the state can be better understood, and the player's level of interest in the game and the performance effect can be increased. Further, by displaying an explanation display according to the performance state, the explanation display can be provided to the player at an appropriate timing, and convenience for the player can be improved.

Further, the control means is provided with an operation means (for example, a production button 192), and when the production state is set to the first production state, even when the first explanation display is displayed, the operation means can be operated. When operated, the second explanation display may be displayed.

With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to check the explanation display regarding the next performance state and the previously set performance state, and it is possible to prepare and review the contents of the performance state. In addition, it is possible to provide the explanatory display required by the player, thereby increasing the player's satisfaction and convenience.

Further, it may include an operating means (for example, a production button 192), and the predetermined condition may be that the operating means is operated. Further, the predetermined condition may be a transition to a new production state set by the setting means.

<Display mode of remaining G number>
Next, the display mode of the AT remaining G number (remaining number of games) in the AT state will be described using FIG. 24. Note that FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of changes in the display mode such as displaying the number of AT remaining Gs and displaying the number of acquired medals.

<Display mode of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 38)>
The state shown in FIG. 24(a) is a state in which a start operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining number of G's 38), and the push order bell is internally won.

In the slot machine according to this example, in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state), the number of games displayed (for example, the number of AT remaining Gs displayed) indicating the number of games played in the certain gaming state, and the number of acquired gaming values are displayed. It is possible to display an acquisition number display (for example, a display of the number of acquired medals), and also a display of the number of awarded games (for example, a display of the number of AT additional Gs) indicating the number of newly awarded games in a certain gaming state. It is composed of

In the state shown in FIG. 24(a), since the number of AT remaining G in the AT state is 38 games, the number of games played in the AT state (a certain game state) is shown in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. As the AT remaining G number display RG (play count display), a character string "38 G remaining" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black).

In addition, in the same state, since the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 6, in the upper right display area of the effect image display device 157, the number of acquired medals display MC ( As the acquisition number display), the character string "6 pieces" is displayed in a normal color (in this example, black).

The state shown in FIG. 24(b) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in the game in the AT state (remaining number of G's 38) and the push order bell is won.

In the same state, since the AT remaining G number in the AT state does not change for 38 games, the AT remaining G number display indicating the number of games in the AT state (a certain gaming state) is displayed in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. As RG (game count display), a character string "38G remaining" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black).

On the other hand, in the same state, 13 medals were obtained by winning the push order bell, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (=6 + 13), so the upper right corner of the effect image display device 157 In the display area, a character string "19" is displayed in a normal color (in this example, black) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (gaming value).

<Display mode of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 37)/Additional 10 G>
The state shown in FIG. 24(c-1) is a state in which a start operation (pressing the start lever 135) is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs: 37), an additional lottery is won, and 10Gs are awarded. It is.

In the same state, since the AT remaining G number in the AT state is 37 games, the AT remaining G number display RG indicating the number of games in the AT state (a certain gaming state) is displayed in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. As a display of the number of games played, a character string "37G remaining" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black).

In addition, in the same state, since the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 17, in the upper right display area of the effect image display device 157, the number of acquired medals display MC ( The character string "17 pieces" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black) as the number of acquisitions (obtained number display).

In addition, in the same state, since the player won the additional lottery in the AT state and was awarded 10 new games, an additional effect is executed to notify the AT additional G number display AG indicating the AT additional G number, and the additional effect is As the AT additional G number display AG in , a character string "+10G" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black).

The state shown in FIG. 24(d-1) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in a game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs: 37), and a certain prize winning combination with the number of payouts of 2 coins is won.

In the same state, 10 new games were awarded by winning the additional lottery, and the remaining AT state number in the AT state became 47G (=37G + 10G), so in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157, the AT state As the AT remaining G number display RG (play count display) indicating the number of games played (in a certain gaming state), a character string "47 G remaining" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black).

In addition, in the same state, two medals were obtained by winning a certain winning combination, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (=17 + 2), so the performance image display device 157 In the upper right display area, the character string "19" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black) as an acquired medal count display MC (acquisition count display) indicating the number of acquired medals (gaming value). .

<Display style of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 37)/Additional 300 G>
The state shown in FIG. 24(c-2) is a state in which the start operation (pressing the start lever 135) is performed in the game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs: 37), the bonus lottery is won, and 300Gs are awarded. This is a modification of the state shown in (c-1) of the same figure.

In the same state, since the number of AT remaining G in the AT state is 37 games and the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 17, the AT remaining G As the number display RG (play count display), the character string "37G remaining" is displayed in the normal color (in this example, black), and as the acquired medal number display MC (acquisition number display), the character string is displayed in the normal color (in this example, black). , black) and displays the character string "17 pieces".

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 24(c-2), the player wins the additional lottery in the AT state, and unlike the state shown in FIG. 24(c-1), 300 games are newly awarded.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state) (for example, when the newly awarded number of additional G becomes 300 G or more), a new A display of the number of awarded games (for example, AT additional G number display AG) indicating the number of games awarded changes from a fifth display mode (for example, black) to a sixth display mode (for example, rainbow color). are doing.

In the state shown in Figure 24 (c-2), the AT state has won the additional lottery and the predetermined condition has been met (the newly awarded number of additional Gs has become 300G or more), so the AT additional G number By executing an additional effect that notifies the display AG, and displaying the character string "+300G" in a special color (in this example, rainbow color) as the AT additional G number display AG in the additional effect, the AT additional G number is displayed. The display AG is changed from black (fifth display mode) to rainbow color (sixth display mode).

According to this example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state, the display mode of the display of the number of games awarded indicating the number of newly awarded games in the certain gaming state is changed, so that the display becomes monotonous. It is possible to give a change to the display of the number of games played, which tends to be inconsistent, and it is possible to liven up the game and increase the interest of the players.

Note that the "predetermined condition" is not limited to a condition that is satisfied when the newly granted number of additional Gs is 300G or more, but is also a condition that is satisfied when the newly granted number of additional Gs exceeds a certain value other than 300G. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the newly granted number of additional Gs reaches a certain value (for example, 500G), or it may be a condition that is satisfied when the newly granted number of additional Gs is a certain value (for example, 500G). It may be a condition that is satisfied when the number falls within a numerical range (for example, 300 G or more and 500 or less), or it is a condition that is satisfied when the most advantageous G number for the player (maximum additional G number) is newly granted. It may be a condition.

In addition, changes in the display mode of the number of awarded games (AT extra G number display) are not limited to this example, and include, for example, the color, pattern, size, shape, etc. of the awarded game number display (AT extra G number display), One, more than one, or all of the fonts may be changed.

In addition, when changing the color of the number of awarded games display (AT additional G number display), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied, for example, the number of awarded games When the number of times (AT additional G number) exceeds the first value, the number of awarded games display (AT additional G number display) changes from black to red, and when it exceeds the second value, the number of awarded games is displayed The display mode of the number of awarded games display (AT additional G number display) may be changed multiple times, such as changing the (AT additional G number display) from red to rainbow color.

The state shown in FIG. 24(d-2) is a state in which the third stop operation is performed in the game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs: 37) and a certain winning combination with a payout number of 2 coins is won. This is a modification of the state shown in (d-1).

In the same state, two medals were obtained by winning a certain winning combination, and the number of medals obtained in the AT state was 19 (=17 + 2), so the upper right corner of the effect image display device 157 In the display area, a character string "19 medals" is displayed in a normal color (in this example, black) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (gaming value).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the first condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state) (for example, when the remaining AT number becomes 300 G or more), a game indicating the number of games in a certain gaming state The number display (for example, AT remaining G number display RG) is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, black) to a second display mode (for example, rainbow color).

In the state shown in FIG. 24 (d-2), unlike the state shown in FIG. 37G+300G), and the first condition is satisfied (AT remaining G number is 300G or more), the number of games played in the AT state (a certain gaming state) is displayed in the upper left display area of the effect image display device 157. By displaying the character string "337G remaining" in a special color (in this example, rainbow color) as the AT remaining G number display RG (play count display), the AT remaining G number display RG can be changed to black (first display mode) to rainbow colors (second display mode).

According to this example, when the first condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state, the display mode of the number of games display indicating the number of games played in the certain gaming state is changed, so that the number of games display which tends to be a monotonous display It is possible to make changes to the game, liven up the game, and increase the interest of the players.

Note that the "first condition" according to the present invention is not limited to a condition that is satisfied when the remaining AT G number becomes 300 G or more, but is also a condition that is satisfied when the AT remaining G number becomes more than a certain value other than 300 G. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the AT remaining G number reaches a specific value (for example, 500 G), or it may be a condition that is satisfied when the AT remaining G number is within a certain numerical range (for example, 300 G or more and 500 or less). The condition may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of Gs is reached, or it may be a condition that is satisfied when the most advantageous G number for the player (the maximum additional G number) is added to the AT remaining G number.

In addition, changes in the display mode of the number of games display (AT remaining G number display RG) are not limited to this example, and include, for example, the color, pattern, size, shape, etc. of the number of games display (AT remaining G number display RG), One, more than one, or all of the fonts may be changed.

In addition, when changing the color of the AT remaining G number display RG (play count display), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied. When the number of Gs (number of games played) exceeds the first value, the AT remaining Gs display RG (displays the number of games played) changes from black to red, and when it exceeds the second value, the AT remaining Gs display is displayed. The display mode of the AT remaining G number display RG (game count display) may be changed multiple times, such as changing RG (game count display) from red to rainbow color.

<Display mode of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 300 → 299)>
The state shown in FIG. 24(e) is the state where the game in the AT state (remaining number of Gs is 300) has ended, and the state shown in FIG. This is a state in which an operation (pressing operation of the start lever 135) has been performed.

In the state shown in FIG. 24(f), three medals are inserted and the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 238 (=241 - 3), so In the display area, a character string "238 medals" is displayed in a normal color (in this example, black) as an acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) indicating the number of acquired medals (gaming value).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the number of games is displayed in the second display mode (for example, rainbow color), if the second condition is satisfied (for example, if the remaining AT number is less than 300G) ), the game count display is configured to change (return) to the first display mode (for example, black).

In the state shown in FIG. 24(f), the remaining AT G number has changed from 300G to 299G, and the second condition has been satisfied (the AT remaining G number has fallen below 300G). In the display area, the character string "299G remaining" is displayed in normal color (in this example, black) as an AT remaining G number display RG (play count display) indicating the number of games played in the AT state (a certain gaming state). As a result, the AT remaining G number display RG is changed (returned) from rainbow color (second display mode) to black (first display mode).

If the display of the number of games played in the second display mode continues, the display becomes troublesome for the player, and there is a risk that the game becomes less exciting.However, according to this example, the number of games played is displayed in the second display mode. When the second condition is met, the number of games displayed changes to the first display mode. It is possible to avoid a situation where the desire to play decreases.

<Display mode of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 179)>
The state shown in FIG. 24(g) is a state in which the third stop operation has been performed in the AT state (remaining number of Gs is 179).

In the slot machine according to this example, when the third condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state) (for example, when the number of acquired medals becomes 1000 or more), the acquired number display indicating the number of acquired gaming values is displayed. (For example, the number of acquired medals display MC) is configured to change from the third display mode (for example, black) to the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color).

In the state shown in FIG. 24(g), the number of medals acquired in the AT state in the game is 1000, and the third condition is satisfied (the number of acquired medals is 1000 or more), so the production image In the upper right display area of the display device 157, a character string "1000 coins" is displayed in a special color (in this example, rainbow color) as an acquired medal count display MC (acquisition count display) indicating the number of acquired medals (gaming value). By displaying , the acquired medal number display MC is changed from black (third display mode) to rainbow color (fourth display mode).

According to this example, when the third condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state, the display format of the number of acquisitions display that indicates the number of acquired gaming values is changed, so that the display of the number of acquisitions that tends to be monotonous is changed. This can liven up the game and increase the interest of the players.

Note that the "third condition" according to the present invention is not limited to a condition that is satisfied when the number of acquired medals reaches 1000 or more, but when the number of acquired medals exceeds a certain number other than 1000. It may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of acquired medals reaches a certain number (for example, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, etc.), or it may be a condition that is satisfied when the number of acquired medals is It may be a condition that is met when a certain numerical range (for example, 500 to 1000 medals or less) is reached, or a condition that is met when the upper limit of medals that can be acquired in a certain gaming state is reached. There may be.

Further, changes in the display mode of the acquisition number display (display of the number of acquired medals) are not limited to this example, and for example, changes in the color, pattern, size, shape, and font of the acquisition number display (display of the number of acquired medals) One, more, or all may be changed.

In addition, when changing the color of the number of acquired medals (display of the number of acquired medals), colors other than black and rainbow colors may be applied, or three or more colors may be applied. When the number of medals (number of medals) exceeds a first value (for example, 500 medals), the acquired number display (display of the number of medals acquired) changes from black to red, and when the number of medals obtained exceeds a second value (for example, 1000 medals). In this case, the display mode of the acquisition number display (display of the number of acquired medals) may be changed multiple times, such as changing the acquisition number display (display of the number of acquired medals) from red to rainbow color.

Furthermore, in the slot machine according to the present example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state) (for example, when the number of acquired medals becomes 1000 or more), the number of acquired gaming values increases to a certain value. (For example, 1000 copies) is displayed in a fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color) configured to run.

In the state shown in FIG. 24(g), the number of medals acquired in the AT state is 1000, and since the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of acquired medals is 1000 or more), the number of acquired gaming values is As the specified number breakthrough effect OP indicating that a certain value (in this example, 1000 sheets) has been reached, a character string "1000 sheets OVER" is displayed in a special color (in this example, rainbow color).

According to this example, it is possible to highlight the effect of exceeding the specified number, which indicates that the number of acquired gaming values has reached a certain value, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. In particular, if the display style of the performance of exceeding the specified number is the same as the display of the number of acquisitions, which tends to be monotonous (for example, rainbow color), both the display of the number of acquisitions and the performance of exceeding the specified number can be made to stand out. , it is possible to further increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, the performance of exceeding the specified number is not limited to 1000 sheets, but is performed in increments of 250 sheets, such as 250 sheets, 500 sheets, and 750 sheets.Even in this specified number of sheets, if the number of sheets exceeds 1000 sheets, the normal color (black).

<Display mode of remaining G number/AT status (remaining G number 200)>
The state shown in FIG. 24(h) is a state in which a start operation (pushing down the start lever 135) is performed in the AT state (remaining number of Gs: 200).

In the slot machine according to this example, the acquired number display (for example, the acquired medal count display MC) changes from the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color) to the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color) before a certain gaming state (for example, AT state) ends. The display mode is configured so that it does not change (return) to the third display mode (for example, black).

In the state shown in FIG. 24(h), the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 997, and the third condition is no longer satisfied (the number of medals obtained is less than 1000). In the upper right display area, a character string "997 medals" is displayed in a special color (in this example, rainbow color) as an acquired medal number display MC (obtained number display).

If a certain gaming state continues, the number of game values acquired will basically increase, but for example, the number of acquired values may temporarily increase due to a mistake in the pressing order or a losing combination. If the number of acquisitions displayed in the fourth display mode is changed back to the third display mode when the number of acquisitions decreases to According to this example, even if the third condition is no longer satisfied, the number of acquisitions in the fourth display mode is continued to be displayed and the number of acquisitions is not returned to the third display mode, which reduces the player's desire to play. You can avoid situations like this.

Regarding the acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display), even if the number of acquired medals was less than 1000, the special color (in this example, rainbow color) was set to continue, but if a certain value (for example, 900 sheets), the color may be returned to the normal color (in this example, black). Further, a preferable value for this certain value is a value that does not reach the state where the number of acquired medals is 1000 even if no medals are acquired for several games.

By doing this, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player's desire to play decreases even if he/she draws a losing combination consecutively, and also avoids a situation where the number of medals earned decreases significantly for some reason. In this case, it is possible to prevent the acquired medal number display MC (acquired number display) from becoming a display that is troublesome to the player, and to avoid a situation in which the player's desire to play decreases.

<Display format/summary of remaining G number>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a setting means (for example, a game state control process) that can set one of a plurality of game states. A gaming machine comprising: a gaming machine in which the plurality of gaming states include a certain gaming state (for example, an AT state), and in the certain gaming state, a number of games indicating the number of games in the certain gaming state; It is possible to display a display (for example, the AT remaining G number display RG shown in FIG. 24), and when the first condition is satisfied in the certain gaming state (for example, when the AT remaining G number becomes 300 G or more), the said game This game machine is characterized in that the number display changes from a first display mode (for example, black) to a second display mode (for example, rainbow color).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the display of the number of games played, which tends to be a monotonous display, and it is possible to liven up the game and increase the interest of the players.

Further, when the number of games is displayed in the second display mode (e.g., rainbow color), if the first condition is no longer satisfied (e.g., when the remaining AT number is less than 300G), The display of the number of games played may change to the first display mode (for example, black).

If the display of the number of games played in the second display mode is continued, the display becomes a nuisance for the player, and there is a risk that the game becomes less popular. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming bothersome and to avoid a situation where the player's desire to play decreases.

Further, in the certain gaming state, it is possible to display an acquired number display (for example, the obtained medal number display MC shown in FIG. 24) indicating the number of acquired gaming values, and in the certain gaming state, the second condition is satisfied. (for example, when the number of acquired medals reaches 1000 or more), the acquired number display changes from the third display mode (for example, black) to the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color), and the acquired number display changes from the third display mode (for example, black) to the fourth display mode (for example, rainbow color). may be such that the fourth display mode does not change to the third display mode when the second condition is no longer satisfied before the certain gaming state ends.

If a certain gaming state continues, the number of game values acquired will basically increase, but for example, the number of acquired values may temporarily increase due to a mistake in the pressing order or a losing combination. If the number of acquisitions displayed in the fourth display mode is changed back to the third display mode when the number of acquisitions decreases to With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player's desire to play decreases.

Note that the configuration of the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game machine according to the above embodiment, and for example, "a certain gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT state, The advantageous zone may be a normal state, a CZ, a specialized zone, a pullback chance zone, an ending state, or the like.

<Stock priority>
Next, the stock priority order will be explained using FIGS. 25 to 27.

Here, before explaining the priority order of stocks, the gaming state will be explained. As mentioned above, the gaming state of the slot machine according to this example has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section includes an advantageous section. There are the normal state (normal state), CZ state, normal AT state (AT state), specialization zone, pullback chance zone, and ending state (ED).

The specialized zone is a gaming state in which additional games are likely to be awarded (or are always awarded), and in this example, the special zone is the red 7 specialized zone (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the specialized zone (red 7)). , the blue 7 specialized zone (hereinafter referred to as the specialized zone (blue 7)) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the red 7 specialized zone (in this example, a gaming state where additional games are more likely to be awarded). ) exists.

Note that the specialized zone may be any gaming state in which players can acquire advantageous rights, such as a gaming state in which they win (or are likely to win) a specific winning combination, a gaming state in which points are easily awarded, or , a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus), etc. In addition, the specialized zone is not limited to two types; for example, a specialized zone (red 7) or a zone other than the specialized zone (blue 7) (for example, a specialized zone (red 7) or a specialized zone (blue There may be a zone that is more advantageous to the player than 7) or a zone that is more disadvantageous to the player than the specialized zone (red 7) or the specialized zone (blue 7).

In the AT state, a specialized zone lottery is executed to determine whether to move to the specialized zone every game, and if the specialized zone (red 7) is won in the specialized zone lottery in the AT state, the player can enter the special zone. It is possible to acquire a right (first right) that can be transferred to the conversion zone (red 7).

The state in which the right (first right) that can be transferred to this specialization zone (red 7) is acquired (stocked) is sometimes referred to as the "red 7 stock state", and the first right that has been acquired (stocked) is The rights are sometimes referred to as "red 7 stocks" and the number of first rights is sometimes referred to as "the number of red 7 stocks."

Also, if the player wins the specialized zone (blue 7) in the specialized zone lottery in the AT state, the player has the right to move to the specialized zone (blue 7) (a second right that is more advantageous than the first right). It is possible to obtain

The state in which the right (second right) that can be transferred to this specialization zone (blue 7) is acquired (stocked) is sometimes referred to as the "blue 7 stock state", and the second right that has been acquired (stocked) is The right may be referred to as "7 blue stocks" and the number of second rights may be referred to as "number of blue 7 stocks".

In addition, if you have acquired (stocked) a right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7) in the red 7 stock state, or if you are in the specialization zone (red 7) in the blue 7 stock state, The state in which transferable rights (first rights) have been acquired is sometimes referred to as a "red 7 blue 7 stock state."

In this example, even if you win the specialized zone lottery in an AT game, you will not be immediately transferred to the specialized zone, but the right to transfer to the specialized zone (red 7) (first right) (Red 7 stock state), if a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the remaining AT number becomes 0 in the AT state), the first right may be used, and the specialized zone When you have acquired the right (second right) that can be transferred to (Blue 7) (Blue 7 stock state), if a certain condition is met (for example, if the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0) ), use said second right.

<Stock priority order (Example 1)>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the stock priority order (Example 1).

Embodiment 1 is an example in which when blue 7 is stocked in a red 7 stock state, blue stock is prioritized over red 7 stock.

<Stock priority (Example 1)/Red 7 stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 25 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) is started.

In the same state, the special zone (red 7) was won in the special zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state), and the red 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 1), As shown in FIG. 25(a), in the stock display area at the bottom right of the effect image display device 157, a red 7 stock display RS indicating the red 7 stock state (in this example, the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed. image) is being displayed.

<Stock priority order (Example 1)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 25 is the state in which the M+1 game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (blue 7) is won in the special zone lottery in the M+1 game (AT state), and the red 7 blue 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 1, number of blue 7 stocks = 1) However, in this example, priority is given to the blue 7 stock display BS (in this example, the image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") over the red 7 stock display RS (in this example, the image of the decorative pattern "Red 7"). It is configured to display as follows.

Therefore, at the timing indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 25, the red 7 stock display RS (decorative pattern "red 7") is Instead of the blue 7 stock display BS (image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") indicating that the blue 7 stock is in the state.

That is, in this example, if the special zone (blue 7) is won in the red 7 stock state, the red 7 stock display RS (the image of the decorative pattern "red 7") and the blue 7 stock display BS (the decorative pattern "red 7") will be displayed. The specialization zone (Blue 7), which is more advantageous to the player, is given priority over the specialization zone (Red 7) without displaying both the Blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "Blue 7" image). ” image).

With such a configuration, information regarding rights that are advantageous to the player can be provided with priority, and the player's convenience and desire to play can be increased.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, both the red 7 stock display RS and the blue 7 stock display BS may be displayed, and in this case, the blue 7 stock display BS is more important than the red 7 stock display RS. In order to stand out, the size of the blue 7 stock display BS may be made larger than the size of the red 7 stock display RS, or the blue 7 stock display BS may be displayed in front of the red 7 stock display RS.

<Stock priority order (Example 1)/Red 7 Blue 7 stock status → Blue 7 specialization zone>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by the symbol T4 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1) has transitioned to the blue 7 specialized zone.

In the slot machine according to this example, after acquiring a first right (for example, a right that can be transferred to a specialized zone (red 7)), a second right (for example, a right that can be transferred to a specialized zone (blue 7)) is acquired. right), if a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7)) is configured to use .

In the state shown by symbol T4 in FIG. 25, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1) where blue 7 stock is acquired after red 7 stock is acquired. (In this example, the remaining G number of the AT1 set in the AT state is 0.) Therefore, the specialization zone (blue The rights that can be transferred to 7) (second rights) are used preferentially (Blue 7 priority) and transferred to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, a predetermined right (second right) is prioritized and consumed regardless of the order in which the rights are acquired (first right → second right), so processing takes into consideration the acquisition order. (For example, processing to memorize the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are acquired, processing to update the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are used up, etc.) is not necessary, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine. Therefore, stable game control can be performed.

<Stock priority order (Example 1)/Blue 7 specialization zone → Red 7 stock status>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by the symbol T5 is a state in which the blue 7 specialization zone has ended and the state has transitioned to the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1).

In the same state, by using (extinguishing) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7), the number of stocks in the specialization zone (blue 7) goes from 1 to 0, and the red 7 stock state (Red 7 stock number = 1), as shown in FIG. 25(c), the Blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "Blue 7" The red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed instead of the red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7").

<Stock priority (Example 1)/AT status → Red 7 specialization zone>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by the symbol T6 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1) has transitioned to the red 7 specialized zone.

In the same state, in the red 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1), the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the remaining G number of the AT1 set in the AT state is 0), so the specialized zone ( Red 7) uses the right that can be transferred (first right) and moves to the Red 7 specialization zone.

<Stock priority (Example 1)/Red 7 specialization zone → AT state (no stock)>
In FIG. 25, the state indicated by the symbol T7 is a state in which the red 7 specialization zone has ended and the state has transitioned to an AT state in which there is no stock in the specialization zone.

In the same state, the right (first right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (red 7) is used (extinguished), and the stock number of the specialization zone (red 7) goes from 1 to 0, and the specialization zone Since there is no stock, as shown in FIG. 25(d), the red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed in the stock display area at the bottom right of the effect image display device 157. The display is being erased.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the stock priority order (Example 2).

The second embodiment is an example in which when red 7 is stocked and blue 7 is further stocked in the blue 7 stock state, two blue stocks are prioritized and consumed.

<Stock priority (Example 2)/Blue 7 stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 26 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (blue 7) was won in the special zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state), and the blue 7 stock state (number of blue 7 stocks = 1) was obtained. As shown in FIG. 26(a), in the stock display area at the bottom right of the effect image display device 157, there is a blue 7 stock display BS (in this example, the decorative pattern "Blue 7") indicating the blue 7 stock state. image) is being displayed.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 26 is the state where the M+1 game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (red 7) is won in the special zone lottery in the M+1 game (AT state), and the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 1, blue 7 stock number = 1) However, in this example, the configuration is such that the blue 7 stock display BS (the image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") is displayed with priority over the red 7 stock display RS (the image of the decorative pattern "Red 7"). ing.

Therefore, at the timing indicated by the symbol T3 shown in FIG. 26, as shown in FIG. The blue 7 stock display BS (the image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") continues without starting the "Blue 7" image).

That is, in this example, if the special zone (red 7) is won in the blue 7 stock state, the red 7 stock display RS (the image of the decorative pattern "red 7") and the blue 7 stock display BS (the decorative pattern "red 7") will be displayed. The specialization zone (Blue 7), which is more advantageous to the player, is given priority over the specialization zone (Red 7) without displaying both the Blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "Blue 7" image). ” image).

With such a configuration, information regarding rights that are advantageous to the player can be provided with priority, and the player's convenience and desire to play can be increased.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 26 is the state where the M+8th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, the special zone (blue 7) was won in the special zone lottery in the M+8th game (AT state), resulting in a blue 7 stock state (blue 7 stock number = 2), but in this example, the blue Even if the number of 7 stocks becomes 2 or more (when there are multiple blue 7 stocks), only one blue 7 stock display BS (image of the decorative pattern "Blue 7") is displayed. are doing.

Therefore, at the timing indicated by the symbol T5 in FIG. 26, the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "Blue 7") is Only one image) is displayed.

Although the explanation is omitted, when the number of red 7 stocks becomes 2 or more (when there are multiple red 7 stocks), the red 7 stock display RS (for example, the image of the decorative pattern "red 7") ) is configured to display only one.

With this configuration, not only can the player be reliably informed of the presence or absence of special zone rights, but also the AT state ends before all the stocked special zone rights are used up. Even if the player loses interest in the game, it may be possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this example, and when the number of blue 7 stocks is 2 or more (when there is a plurality of blue 7 stocks), a plurality of blue 7 stock display BSs may be displayed. , when the number of red 7 stocks becomes 2 or more (when there is a plurality of red 7 stocks), a plurality of red 7 stock display RSs may be displayed.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 stock status → Blue 7 specialization zone>
The state indicated by the symbol T6 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 1, number of blue 7 stocks = 2) has transitioned to the blue 7 specialized zone.

In the slot machine according to this example, after acquiring the second right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (Blue 7)), the first right (for example, the right that can be transferred to the specialized zone (Red 7)) is acquired. right), if a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7)) is configured to use .

In the state indicated by the symbol T6 in FIG. 26, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the red 7 blue 7 stock state where the red 7 stock is acquired after the blue 7 stock is acquired (the number of red 7 stocks = 1, the number of blue 7 stocks = 2). (In this example, the remaining G number of the AT1 set in the AT state is 0.) Therefore, the specialization zone (blue The rights that can be transferred to 7) (second rights) are used preferentially (Blue 7 priority) and transferred to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right, which is advantageous to the player, can be used preferentially, so that the player's Can increase motivation. In addition, in order to give priority to a predetermined right (second right) regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), processing that takes into account the acquisition order (for example, rights There is no need to perform processes such as storing the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when acquiring rights, or updating the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are used up, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and providing a stable system. Game control can be performed.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Blue 7 specialization zone → Red 7 Blue 7 stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T7 in FIG. 26 is a state in which the blue 7 specialization zone has ended and the state has shifted to the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 1, number of blue 7 stocks = 1).

In the same state, by using (extinguishing) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7), the number of stocks in the specialization zone (blue 7) will go from 2 to 1, and red 7 blue 7 The state has become stocked (number of red 7 stocks = 1, number of blue 7 stocks = 1), but in this example, the blue 7 stock display BS (decoration Since the image of the symbol "Blue 7" is configured to be displayed with priority, as shown in FIG. 26(d), the blue 7 stock is Display BS (image of decorative pattern "Blue 7") continues.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Red 7 Blue 7 stock status → Blue 7 specialization zone>
In FIG. 26, the state indicated by the symbol T8 is a state in which the AT state of the red 7 blue 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1, the number of blue 7 stocks=1) has transitioned to the blue 7 specialized zone.

In the slot machine according to this example, after acquiring a first right (for example, a right that can be transferred to a specialized zone (red 7)), a second right (for example, a right that can be transferred to a specialized zone (blue 7)) is acquired. right), if a predetermined condition is met (for example, when the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0), the second right (right that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7)) is configured to use .

In the state indicated by the symbol T8 in FIG. 26, the predetermined condition is satisfied in the red 7 blue 7 stock state where the red 7 stock is acquired after the blue 7 stock is acquired (the number of red 7 stocks = 1, the number of blue 7 stocks = 1). (In this example, the remaining AT number in the AT state is 0.) Therefore, the specialization zone (blue 7) is more important than the right (first right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (red 7). It preferentially uses the rights that can be transferred to (second rights) (Blue 7 priority) and moves to the Blue 7 specialized zone.

According to this example, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right, which is advantageous to the player, can be used preferentially, so that the player's Can increase motivation. In addition, in order to give priority to a predetermined right (second right) regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), processing that takes into account the acquisition order (for example, rights There is no need to perform processes such as storing the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when acquiring rights, or updating the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are used up, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and providing a stable system. Game control can be performed.

<Stock priority order (Example 2)/Blue 7 specialization zone → Red 7 stock status>
In FIG. 26, the state indicated by the symbol T9 is a state in which the blue 7 specialization zone has ended and the state has shifted to the AT state of the red 7 stock state (the number of red 7 stocks=1).

In the same state, by using (extinguishing) the right (second right) that can be transferred to the specialization zone (blue 7), the number of stocks in the specialization zone (blue 7) goes from 1 to 0, and the red 7 stock state (Red 7 stock number = 1), as shown in FIG. 26(d), the Blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern "Blue 7" The red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7") is displayed instead of the red 7 stock display RS (image of the decorative pattern "red 7").

<Stock priority order (Example 3)>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the stock priority order (Embodiment 3).

Example 3 is an example in which red 7 stocks and blue 7 stocks disappear when the AT state is in the red 7 blue 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 2, number of blue 7 stocks = 1) and shifts to the ending state. It is.

<Stock priority order (Example 3)/Red 7 Blue 7 Stock status>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 27 is the state in which the M-th game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, in the specialized zone lottery in the game before the M game (AT state), the specialized zone (red 7) was won twice and the specialized zone (blue 7) was won once, and the red 7 blue 7 stock was won. (red 7 stock number = 2, blue 7 stock number = 1), but in this example, the blue 7 stock display BS (decorative pattern As shown in FIG. 27(a), the blue 7 stock is displayed in the lower right stock display area of the effect image display device 157. BS (image of decorative pattern "Blue 7") is displayed.

<Stock priority order (Example 3)/additional lottery winning>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 27 is the state where the M+2 game (AT state) has started.

In the same state, in the red 7 blue 7 stock state (number of red 7 stocks = 2, number of blue 7 stocks = 1), the player wins the additional lottery, and 38 games are awarded as the number of additional games.

In the slot machine according to this example, a condition (for example, the difference in the number of coins expected to be acquired) that is satisfied when a certain value (for example, the difference in the number of coins expected to be acquired) exceeds a specified value (for example, 2000 coins) in a certain performance state (for example, AT state) is established. When a specific condition) is met, the state moves to a specific state (e.g., ending (ED) state), and a certain value has the first right (e.g., red 7 stock) and the second right (e.g., It is configured to include a certain value that is expected to be acquired when using the blue 7 stock (for example, the difference in the number of coins that are expected to be acquired in the specialized zone (red 7) and the specialized zone (blue)).

As mentioned above, in the slot machine according to the present example, if the difference in the number of coins (a certain value) is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 2000 coins) in the AT state (a certain performance state), the slot machine enters the ending state (specific state). ) (see route R8 in FIG. 8(a)).

Here, the "difference number (certain value)" that is the criterion for determining whether to move to the ending state (specific state) includes red 7 stocks (first right) or blue 7 stocks (second right). ), the corresponding value (for example, Includes the difference in the number of pieces expected to be obtained (planned to be obtained) in the specialized zone (red 7) and the specialized zone (blue).

For example, assuming that the average number of additional games in the specialized zone (blue) is 80, the average number of additional games in the specialized zone (red) is 40, and the net increase in the number of cards per game in the AT state is 3, then Figure 27 In the M+2 game (AT state) indicated by code T2, the red 7 blue 7 stock state (red 7 stock number = 2, blue 7 stock number = 1), the number of acquired games (number of remaining games) is 260 games, and Since the number of games is 38, the number of games expected to be acquired in the AT state is 458 games (=80 games × 1 + 40 games × 2 + 260 games + 38 games), and the difference in the number of coins expected to be acquired in the AT state is: There are 1374 cards (=458 games x 3 cards).

Since the number of medals acquired (number of medals already acquired) in the M+2 game (AT state) is 695, the difference in the number of medals in the AT state (including the difference in the number of medals expected to be acquired) in the M+2 game (AT state) is: Since the number of coins is 2069 (=1374 + 695) and reaches the specified value (2000 in this example), the ending state will be entered from the next game.

According to this example, it is possible to shift to a specific state by taking into account the expected number of balls to be won and the number of games played with the first right and the second right, so it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

In addition, in this example, the numbers such as the number of additional games in the specialized zone (blue), the number of additional games in the specialized zone (red), and the net increase in the number of coins per game in the specialized zone are only examples. The invention is not limited to this.

<Stock priority order (Example 3)/AT state → ending state>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 27 is a state that has transitioned from the AT state to the ending state.

In this state, since the state has shifted to the ending state, as shown in FIG. 27(b), an ending effect is executed to notify that the state has shifted to the ending state.

Furthermore, in the slot machine according to the present example, when transitioning from a certain performance state (for example, AT state) to a specific state (for example, ending (ED) state), the first right (for example, red 7 stock) or the first right (for example, red 7 stock) The configuration is such that when the second right (for example, blue 7 stock) is acquired, the acquired right is extinguished.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 27, when transitioning from the AT state (a certain performance state) to the ending state (specific state), two red 7 stocks (first right) and two blue 7 stocks (second right) are used. Since one right) has been acquired, each right disappears, and both the number of red 7 stocks and the number of blue 7 stocks become 0.

According to this example, the value that is expected to be obtained when using the rights acquired as a transition condition for the ending (for example, 7 red stocks, 7 blue stocks) is also included, so the rights are acquired. In some cases, there is a high possibility of transitioning to an ending (specific state), and there is a possibility that rights will be extinguished upon transition to a specific state. Therefore, by giving priority to the rights that are advantageous to the player (the second right) and reducing the possibility that the rights that are advantageous to the player (the second right) will be extinguished, the player's sense of disappointment can be reduced. It is possible to reduce this and maintain the desire to play.

In addition, in this example, if the first right (for example, red 7 stocks) or the second right (for example, blue 7 stocks) is acquired when transitioning to the ending state, Since the right is configured to disappear, as shown in FIG. 27, even if the ending state is changed to the AT state again via the normal state, the specialized zone lottery will be held again in the AT game. You will not win the first right (eg, red 7 stock) or the second right (eg, blue 7 stock) unless you win.

<Stock Priority/Summary>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has rights advantageous to the player (for example, specialized A gaming machine that can acquire a zone right, etc., in which the right includes a first right (for example, red 7 stock) and a second right that is more advantageous than the first right (for example, blue 7 stock). 7 stock) and has acquired the first right, if a predetermined condition is met (for example, if the remaining G number of AT1 set in AT state becomes 0, the condition for transition to the specialized zone is If the conditions under which the first right or the second right can be used are established, etc.), the first right may be used, and if the second right has been acquired, the predetermined If a condition is met, the second right may be used, and if the first right is acquired after acquiring the second right, if the predetermined condition is met, the second right may be used. It is a game machine characterized by the fact that it is used.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if both the first right and the second right are acquired, the second right, which is advantageous to the player, can be used preferentially. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play. In addition, in order to give priority to a predetermined right (second right) regardless of the order in which rights are acquired (second right → first right), processing that takes into account the acquisition order (for example, rights There is no need to perform processes such as storing the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when acquiring rights, or updating the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are used up, reducing the control burden on the gaming machine and providing a stable system. Game control can be performed.

Further, in the case where the second right is acquired after acquiring the first right, the second right may be used if the predetermined condition is met.

With this structure, the predetermined right (second right) is given priority regardless of the order in which the rights are acquired (first right → second right), so the acquisition order is taken into consideration. There is no need to perform additional processing (for example, processing to store the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are acquired, processing to update the number of rights and the order in which rights are acquired when rights are used up, etc.), and the control burden on the gaming machine is reduced. This allows for stable game control.

In addition, in the certain performance state, when a specific condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a specific state (for example, an ending state), and the specific condition is a certain value (for example, the number of differential sheets in the AT state, the number of acquired games in the AT state, etc.). ) exceeds a specified value (for example, 2000 coins for the difference in the number of coins, 500 games for the number of games), and the certain value includes the first right that has been acquired. and the certain value of the probability of acquisition (scheduled acquisition) when the second right is used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to shift to a specific state by taking into account the expected number of balls and the number of games that are expected to be obtained with the first right and second right, so it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game. .

Furthermore, if the first right or the second right is acquired when transitioning from the certain performance state to the specific state, even if the acquired right is extinguished. good.

With such a configuration, even if many rights are acquired in a certain presentation state, there is a possibility that the rights will be lost when transitioning to a specific state, which will significantly reduce the player's desire to play. However, since it is possible to give priority to rights that are advantageous to the player (secondary rights) and make it difficult for the rights to be extinguished, this reduces the player's sense of disappointment and increases his or her desire to play. can be sustained.

Note that the configuration of the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game machine according to the above embodiment, and for example, the "performance state", "gaming state", and "specific state" according to the present invention are , advantageous zone normal state, CZ, normal AT state, specialization zone, pullback chance zone, and ending state may be used. Further, the "rights advantageous to the player" are not limited to specialized zones, and may be, for example, rights that can be transferred to a special state (for example, a bonus).

[Other embodiments]
Next, slot machines according to other embodiments will be described using FIGS. 28 to 43. Note that, hereinafter, the explanation of the same configuration as the slot machine explained using FIGS. 1 to 27 will be omitted, and only the different configuration will be explained.

The slot machine according to the present embodiment includes a gaming state control means (for example, the gaming state control process shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state, and this gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, the (a), a non-advantageous section normal state, an advantageous section normal state), and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, the normal AT state, CZ, special state shown in FIG. 8(a)). In addition to the transformation zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.), a first standby state, and a second standby state that is less advantageous than the first standby state.

<Predicting the push order before transitioning to the second gaming state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the pressing order guessing before shifting to the second gaming state will be explained.

<Press order guess/push order bell before transition to second game state>
First, the push order bell of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 28(a). FIG. 28(a) is a table showing the lottery probability of the bell in the order of pressing, the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the number of coins to be paid out corresponding to the operation details of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in this embodiment. This is a modification of the table described above.

The slot machine according to the present embodiment includes an internal winning result determining means (for example, the winning winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 4) that determines the internal winning result of the winning combination based on lottery information, and a value (for example, medals). , number information) (for example, the medal payout process shown in FIG. 4), and a push order bell A and a push order bell B as winning combinations (achieved winning combinations).

The push order bells A and B in this example are composed of duplicate roles, and if the winning role is internally won in the internal lottery process, the contents of the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, the order of the stop operations) The winning combination is different depending on the order) and the number of coins to be paid out is also different.

In addition, in this specification, (1) the stop operation in the stop order of left middle right is LCR operation, (2) the stop operation in the stop order of left and right middle is LRC operation, and (3) the stop operation in the stop order of middle left and right. (4) The stop operation in the stop order of the center right and left is the CRL operation. (5) The stop operation in the stop order of the right and left middle is the RLC operation. (6) The stop operation in the stop order of the right middle left is the RCL operation. It may be written.

The push order bells A of this embodiment are (1) push order bell A_LCR (third result) in which the LCR operation is the correct stop operation, (2) push order bell A_LRC (in which the LRC operation is the correct stop operation). (3) Push order bell A_CLR (second result) in which the CLR operation is the correct stop operation, (4) Push order bell A_CRL (second result) in which the CRL operation is the correct stop operation ), (5) Push order bell A_RLC (first result) where RLC operation is the correct stop operation, (6) Push order bell A_RCL (first result) where RCL operation is the correct stop operation. It is subdivided into.

On the other hand, the push order bell B of this embodiment is (1) a push order bell B_CLR (second result) in which the CLR operation is the correct stop operation, and (2) a push order bell in which the CRL operation is the correct stop operation. B_CRL (second result), (3) push order bell B_RLC (first result) with RLC operation as the correct stop operation, (4) push order bell B_RCL (first result) with RCL operation as the correct stop operation. results).

The lottery probabilities (winning probabilities) for the six duplicate combinations that make up the push order bell A and the lottery probabilities (winning probabilities) for the four duplicate roles that make up the push order bell B are the same 10% (=1/10). ), but in push order B, there is a duplicate combination of push order bell B_LCR (third result) corresponding to push order bell A_LCR, and push order bell B_LRC (third result) corresponding to push order bell A_LRC. Since there are no duplicates, the probability of winning for push order bell A is 60% (=1/10 x 6), while the winning probability for push order bell B is 40% (=1/10 x 4). The probability of winning the push order bell B is lower than the probability of winning the push order bell A.

Also, when focusing on the first stop operation, the lottery probability (winning probability) of push order bell A_LCR and push order bell A_LRC for which the first left stop operation is the correct stop operation is 20% (1/10 x 2). On the other hand, the lottery probability (winning probability) of push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL for which the middle first stop operation is the correct stop operation, and the right first stop operation. The lottery probability (winning probability) of the push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, and push order bell B_RCL, in which is the correct answer stop operation, is 40% (1/10×4).

For this reason, in the slot machine according to this example, the probability (true The probability of the third result (in this example, push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC) (in this example, 20%) is lower than the probability of the third result (in this example, push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC) (in this example, 20%), and the internal winning result (in this example, push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL) is higher than the probability (40% in this example) of the third result (in this example, push order bell B_CRL). The probability (in this example, 20%) of the order bell A_LCR and the push order bell A_LRC is lower.

Note that the contents of push order bells A and B are not limited to this example; for example, a combination of a push order bell B_LCR corresponding to push order bell A_LCR and an overlap of push order bell B_LRC corresponding to push order bell A_LRC. After adding a winning combination and making the number of duplicate winning combinations that make up push order bells A and B the same, the lottery probability (winning probability) of the duplicate winning combination of push order bell B_LCR or push order bell B_LRC is calculated based on other duplicate winning combinations. It may be lower than the role.

For both push order bells A and B, if a stop operation (correct stop operation) is performed in the correct stop order, the first value (9 medals in this example) is given and the first stop is performed. If a stop operation is performed for which only the operation is correct, a second value (in this example, one medal) is given, and if a stop operation is performed for which the first stop operation is incorrect, Depending on the stop operation position (timing of stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139, a third value (in this example, one medal) may be provided, or no value may be provided (in this example, medal payout). (so-called spillage)).

Note that the "first value", "second value", and "third value" according to the present invention are not limited to medals, and for example, if the game machine is a pinball game machine (pachinko machine). If the game machine is an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine, it may be the number information (electronized data corresponding to the number of medals or the number of game balls). good. Further, it is preferable that the "first value" is a greater value than the "second value" or the "third value".

In addition, if the first stop operation is incorrect, no value will be given (in this example, the medal will be It may also be configured such that no payout is made.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the push order bell A_LCR is internally won and the LCR operation which is the correct answer stop operation is performed, three bell symbols are stopped and displayed on the lower right line of the symbol display window 113. (the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes the predetermined display mode), 9 medals are paid out, and when an LRC operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, , if one medal is paid out and a CLR operation, CRL operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation is performed where the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. Depending on the operation position (timing of the stop operation), one medal may be paid out, or no medal may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_LRC is internally won and the LRC operation which is the correct answer stop operation is performed, three bell symbols are stopped and displayed on the upper horizontal line of the symbol display window 113 (display mode of reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), nine medals are paid out, and if an LCR operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is a correct stop operation, one medal is paid out, If the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, such as CLR operation, CRL operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, depending on the stop operation position (stop operation timing) of stop buttons 137 to 139. In some cases, one medal is paid out, and in other cases, no medal is paid out.

If the push order bell A_CLR (or the push order bell B_CLR) is internally won and the CLR operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell symbols will be stopped and displayed on the middle horizontal line of the symbol display window 113 ( (The display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), and if 9 medals are paid out and a CRL operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, 1 medal is paid out. medals have been paid out, and if the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, the stop operation positions of stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medal may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_CRL (or the push order bell B_CRL) is internally won and the CRL operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell symbols are stopped and displayed on the lower right line of the symbol display window 113 ( (The display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), and if 9 medals are paid out and a CLR operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, 1 medal is paid out. medals have been paid out, and if the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, LCR operation, LRC operation, RLC operation, or RCL operation, the stop operation positions of stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medal may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_RLC (or the push order bell B_RLC) is internally won and the RLC operation which is the correct answer stop operation is performed, three bell symbols are stopped and displayed on the lower horizontal line of the symbol display window 113 ( (The display mode of the reels 110 to 112 becomes a predetermined display mode), and if 9 medals are paid out and an RCL operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, 1 medal is paid out. medals have been paid out, and if an LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation is performed in which the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, the stop operation positions of the stop buttons 137 to 139 ( Depending on the timing of the stop operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medal may be paid out.

When the push order bell A_RCL (or the push order bell B_RCL) is internally won and the RCL operation, which is a correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell symbols are stopped and displayed on the small mountain line of the symbol display window 113 (reels 110 to 112 are the predetermined display modes), and when 9 medals are paid out and an RLC operation is performed in which only the first stop operation is the correct stop operation, 1 medal is paid out. If medals are paid out and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation, such as LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation, the stop operation positions of stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop Depending on the timing of the operation, one medal may be paid out, or no medal may be paid out.

<Press order guessing/push order bell and AT lottery before transition to second game state>
Next, using FIG. 28(b), the AT lottery in the case where the push order bell is won will be explained. FIG. 28(b) is a diagram schematically showing an outline of the AT lottery when the push order bell is won.

If you win push order bell A or push order bell B and you press in order (LCR operation) or scissors hit (LRC operation or RLC operation), the AT lottery will be higher than in the case where this is not the case. becomes advantageous. Here, "the AT lottery becomes advantageous" means that the probability of winning the AT lottery increases, the number of additional games when winning the AT lottery increases, etc.

On the other hand, if you win push order bell A or push order bell B and an irregular push (CLR operation, CRL operation, or RCL operation) is performed, the AT lottery will be disadvantageous compared to the case where this is not the case. become. Here, "the AT lottery becomes disadvantageous" means that a penalty is given, such as lowering the probability of winning the AT lottery or reducing the number of additional games if the AT lottery is won.

In addition, this penalty includes not holding an AT lottery, or in the case of a game that shifts to AT play after a certain number of games are played (when there is a so-called "ceiling" as a condition for starting AT play). This also includes stopping counting of the specific number of games only for that game (or for several games).

<Press order guessing/successful push order guessing before transition to second gaming state>
Next, using FIG. 29, a description will be given of changes in the game state when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) is successful.

FIG. 29(a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of changes in the game state, effects, etc. when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) is successful.

<Press order guess before transition to second game state/Press order guess success/M game>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where M (M is a positive integer) game number has been started.

The gaming state of the Mth game is an advantageous section normal state (first gaming state). In this M game, after internally winning the replay (re-gaming role), and winning the AT lottery, as shown in FIG. As part of this, a special effect (in this example, the display of the character string "Win" and the display of the character image of the lord) is executed to suggest that the player has won the AT lottery.

<Press order guess before transition to second game state/Press order guess success/M+1st game>
The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+1 game following the M game has started.

The game state of the M+1 game is a standby state (first standby state) before the transition to the AT game. In this example, since the AT lottery was won in the M-th game, the state shifts from the advantageous section normal state (first gaming state) to the standby state (first standby state), which is the state before shifting to the AT game. There is. In this standby state (first standby state), if a specific winning combination is won internally or if a specific number of winnings is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the additional lottery 1 is performed. ing.

FIG. 29(b) is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 1 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 1.

In this example, when a watermelon, a weak cherry, or a strong cherry is internally won, or when the chance number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the additional lottery 1 is executed. The additional winning probability for each is 10% for watermelon, 15% for chance, 10% for weak cherry, and 15% for strong cherry.

In the M+1 game, the replay (replaying role) is internally won, and the watermelon, weak cherry, and strong cherry are not internally won, and the chance number is not stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, so there is an additional win. Lottery 1 has not been executed.

In the slot machine according to this example, if a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state (for example, standby state) (the result of internal winning is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, press order bell B_RLC, press order bell B_RCL)), the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation means (for example, the order in which the stop operation means are operated (for example, the order in which stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped), the stop target and It is possible to perform a predetermined performance (for example, a press order guessing performance) for making the player select a symbol (design to aim at).

In this example, the press order guessing effect is executed only when the AT hits for the first time. For example, in an AT with a predetermined number of games in one set, when you win the next set's (second consecutive) AT, play the number of games in that AT, and move on to the next set's (second consecutive) AT. does not perform a predetermined effect (for example, press order guess effect).

In the M+1 game, the replay (replay combination) is internally won, and the push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, and push order bell B_RCL (first result) are not internally won. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 3(a-2), the player is in a standby state (first standby state) without performing the push order guessing effect (predetermined effect) using the effect image display device 157. A standby state effect (in this example, a display of the character string "Standby") indicating this is executed.

<Press order guessing before transition to second game state/Push order guessing success/M+2nd game>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+2 game following the M+1 game has started.

The M+2 game state is a standby state (first standby state) before the transition to the AT game. In this example, in the M+1 game standby state (first standby state), the push order performance (predetermined performance) is not executed (the conditions for transitioning to the AT state (second game state) are not satisfied). Therefore, the standby state (first standby state) which is the state before the AT game transition is continued.

In addition, in the M+2 game, the strong cherry is internally won and additional lottery 1 is executed, but the push order bell A_RLC, the push order bell A_RCL, the push order bell B_RLC, and the push order bell B_RCL (first result ) has not been internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the standby state effect (in this example, the character string "Waiting") without executing the press order guess effect (predetermined effect). display) is running.

<Press order guess before transition to second game state/Push order guess success/M+4th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+4th game following the M+3th game has started.

The game state of the M+4th game is a standby state (first standby state) before the transition to the AT game. In this example, in the M+3 game standby state (first standby state), the push order performance (predetermined performance) is not executed (the conditions for transitioning to the AT state (second game state) are not satisfied). Therefore, the standby state (first standby state) is continued.

In addition, in the M+4th game, since the push order bell (RCL), that is, the push order bell A_RCL or the push order bell B_RCL, has been internally won, the effect image display device 157 is used to display a push order guessing effect (a predetermined (presentation) and a standby state production (in this example, display of the character string "Waiting").

The performance mode of the press order guessing performance (predetermined performance) is not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. The third operation order (in this example, the first stop operation is in the left It suggests that the first operation order (in this example, the RCL operation or RLC operation in which the first stop operation is on the right) or the second operation order (in this example, the RCL operation or RLC operation in which the first stop operation is on the right) is not recommended. In this case, an effect is performed that suggests that the first stop operation is medium (CLR operation or CRL operation).

Note that the "predetermined performance" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, a performance in which the AT game does not proceed unless both the push order and the target symbol (the symbol to be stopped and displayed) are hit, or the push order is Although it has been suggested, it may be a production that does not shift to an AT game unless the target symbol is hit.

According to this example, it is possible to have the player perform the stop operation in the first operation order or the second operation order without having the player perform the stop operation in the third operation order, leading to the recommended game. Can be done.

Furthermore, as described above, in the slot machine according to this example, the result of internal winning is the first result (in this example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL). The probability (in this example, 20%) of the third result (in this example, push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC) is lower than the probability (in this example, 40%), and the result is an internal winning result. is the second result (in this example, push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL) than the third result (in this example, 40%). In this case, since the probability of the push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC) is lower (20% in this example), the effect suggesting that the third operation order is not recommended (in this example, the push order bell A_LRC) is lower. By not allowing the player to perform the stop operation in the order of the third operation, it is made difficult for the player to understand that the proportion of the third result as a result of the internal lottery is small. Can be done. Further, even for advanced players who are aware that the percentage of the third result as a result of the internal lottery is small, the performance will not be bothersome and will not reduce their desire to play.

In addition, in this example, the push order effect is executed at the first hit of AT, and the press order effect is not executed at the start of the second series of AT, but the present invention is not limited to this. At the start of AT a certain number of times (for example, the 10th series), it may be configured to perform a press order guessing effect. Further, the AT state after a certain number of times may be a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the AT state before the certain number of times.

Note that at a predetermined timing in the AT state after a certain number of times (for example, at the 20th consecutive time or when a specified number of coins are paid out), the AT state may be changed to the AT state before the certain number of times. Even in this case, the pressing order effect may be executed before shifting to the AT state before a certain number of times.

With such a configuration, by performing the push order guessing performance again when the degree of advantage changes, it is possible to add variety to the game, increase the interest of the game, and improve the push order guessing performance. It can be suggested that the degree of advantage changes depending on the occurrence.

<Press order guess before transition to second game state/Push order guess success/M+5th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T5 in FIG. 29(a) is the state where the M+5th game following the M+4th game has started.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the first case (the case where the internal winning result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL)) In a game in which a predetermined effect (for example, press order guess effect) is executed, the stop operation means (for example, the stop button 137 to 139), the gaming state is configured to shift from a first standby state (for example, standby state) to a second gaming state (for example, AT state).

In this example, in the M+4 game standby state (first standby state) in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order guessing effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the first stop operation is right. Since the right stop button 139 (stop operation means) was operated by RLC operation or RCL operation (first operation order), in the M+5th game, the gaming state is changed from the standby state (first standby state) to AT. state (second gaming state).

According to this example, depending on the order of operation of the stop operation means, the first standby state (in this example, the standby state) may or may not shift from the first standby state (in this example, the AT state) to the second gaming state (in this example, the AT state). Therefore, when the player enters the second gaming state, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of being able to shift to the second gaming state by the player's own stop operation. Even after making the transition, you can increase your desire to play.

FIG. 29(a-4) shows that in the standby state of the M+4 game in which the press order bell (RCL) is internally won and the press order guess effect is executed, the stop button 139 is pressed by the RLC operation in which the first stop operation is on the right. It is a figure showing an example of each display of the symbol display window 113, the stored number display 125, and the effect image display device 157 when operated.

In this example, since the gaming state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to the AT state (second gaming state), the effect image display device 157 replaces the standby state effect and the push order effect. , a push order success effect indicating that the push order guess has been successful is performed (in this example, a character string "Ready" indicating that the AT game is to be started is displayed).

In addition, if the push order bell A_RCL (or push order bell B_RCL) is internally won and the RCL operation, which is the correct answer stop operation, is performed, three bell symbols will be stopped and displayed on the small mountain line of the symbol display window 113. , 9 medals (first value) are paid out.

In addition, Fig. 29 (a-4') shows that in the standby state of the M+4 game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order guess effect is executed, the first stop operation is stopped by the RLC operation to the right. It is a diagram showing an example of each display of the symbol display window 113, the stored number display 125, and the effect image display device 157 when the button 139 is operated.

In this example, since the gaming state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to the AT state (second gaming state), the effect image display device 157 displays the standby state effect (in this example, ”), an AT game start effect (in this example, a character string “Ready” is displayed) that suggests starting an AT game is performed.

Also, if the push order bell A_RCL (or push order bell B_RCL) is internally won and an RLC operation is performed in which the first stop operation is the only correct stop operation, one medal (second value) is paid out.

According to this example, not only when an RCL operation is performed which is a correct stop operation, but also when an RLC operation where only the first stop operation is a correct stop operation is performed, it is regarded as a correct stop operation, and the second stop operation is considered to be a correct stop operation. The game state (in this example, AT state) prevents the difficulty level of guessing the push order from becoming too high and prevents the player's desire to play from decreasing. It is possible to prevent the performance from becoming a nuisance for the player. In addition, by differentiating the value given in the order of the stop operations for transitioning to the second gaming state (in this example, the AT state), it is possible to provide a new game experience that has not existed before. , it is possible to increase player's interest.

In the AT state (second gaming state), when a specific winning combination is won internally or when a specific number of outcomes is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the additional lottery 2 is configured to be performed. There is.

FIG. 29(c) is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 2 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 2.

In this example, the additional lottery 2 is configured to be executed when a watermelon, a weak cherry, or a strong cherry is internally won, or when the chance number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113. The winning probability for each is 15% for watermelon, 20% for chance, 15% for weak cherry, and 20% for strong cherry. This is higher than the winning probability of 1.

That is, the top-up lottery 2 in the AT state (second gaming state) is a lottery that is more advantageous for the player than the top-up lottery 1 in the standby state (first standby state). Note that the numerical value of the winning probability of the additional lottery 2 is not limited to this example, and the additional lottery in the AT state (second gaming state) is better for players than the additional lottery in the standby state (first waiting state). It's fine if it's advantageous.

Therefore, for example, in the standby state (first standby state), the additional lottery may not be performed, or the number of winning combinations for which the additional lottery is performed may be smaller than in the AT state (second gaming state). For example, in the AT state (second gaming state), if a watermelon or weak cherry is internally won, an additional lottery will be performed, but in the standby state (first standby state), an additional lottery will be drawn only if a weak cherry is internally won. It may be configured to perform a lottery.

<Press order guessing/push order guessing failure before transition to second game state>
Next, using FIG. 30, a description will be given of changes in the game state when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) fails.

FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of a change in the game state, an effect, etc. when the pressing order guessing (choice guessing) fails. In addition, the flow of the game until the first press order guessing performance indicated by symbols T1 to T3 in the figure is started, and the game flow until the first push order guessing production indicated by symbols T1 to T4 in FIG. 29 is started. Since the flow is substantially the same, the explanation thereof will be omitted, and the explanation will be given below from the point of end of the M+2 game, which is indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 30.

<Press order guessing before transition to second game state/Press order guessing failure/M+2nd game end>
The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 30(a) is the state in which the M+2 game has been completed.

In the slot machine according to this example, in the first case (the case where the internal winning result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL)) In a game in which a predetermined effect (for example, press order guess effect) is executed, the stop operation means (for example, the stop button 137 to 139), the game state does not shift from the first standby state (e.g., standby state) to the second gaming state (e.g., AT state), but changes to the second standby state (e.g., standby state 2). ).

In this example, in the standby state (first standby state) of the M+2 game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order guess effect (predetermined effect) is executed, the first stop operation is left or center. Since the left stop button 137 or the middle stop button 138 (stop operation means) was operated with the LCR operation, LC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation (first operation order), the next M+2 game In the game, the gaming state is shifted from a standby state (first standby state) to standby state 2 (second standby state).

In standby state 2 (second standby state), if a specific winning combination is won internally or if a specific number of outcomes is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, additional lottery 3 is performed. ing.

FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing an example of winning combinations for which the additional lottery 3 is executed and the winning probability of the additional lottery 3.

In this example, when a watermelon, a weak cherry, or a strong cherry is internally won, or when the chance number is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, the additional lottery 3 is executed. The winning probability for each is 0% for watermelon, 0% for chance, 5% for weak cherry, and 0% for strong cherry. This is lower than the winning probability of 1 or the winning probability of additional lottery 2 explained using FIG. 29(c).

In other words, the top-up lottery 3 in the standby state 2 (second standby state) is more convenient for the player than the top-up lottery 2 in the AT state (second gaming state) and the top-up lottery 1 in the standby state (first standby state). This is an unfavorable lottery. Note that the numerical value of the winning probability of the additional lottery 3 is not limited to this example, and the degree of advantage of standby state 2 (second standby state) is different from that of standby state (first standby state) and AT state (second standby state). It only needs to be lower than the advantage level of the gaming state).

Therefore, for example, in the standby state 2 (second standby state), the additional lottery may not be performed, or the number of winning combinations for which the additional lottery is performed may be changed in the standby state (first standby state) or in the AT state ( For example, in the standby state (first standby state) or AT state (second play state), an additional lottery is performed if watermelon or weak cherry is internally won. However, in standby state 2 (second standby state), an additional lottery may be performed only when a weak cherry is internally won.

According to this example, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she was unable to shift to the second gaming state (in this example, the AT state) due to the player's own stop operation, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing. . Furthermore, if the degree of advantage of the second standby state is high, there is a concern that the second standby state will be delayed, but if the degree of advantage of the second standby state (in this example, standby state 2) is By making the second standby state (in this example, standby state 2) lower than the standby state (in this example, standby state) (by making the advantage of the second standby state (in this example, standby state 2) significantly lower), the second standby state can be extended. can be prevented.

FIG. 30(a-4) shows the LCR operation and LC operation in which the first stop operation is left or center in the standby state of the M+2 game in which the push order bell (RCL) is internally won and the push order guess effect is executed. , A diagram showing an example of each display on the symbol display window 113, stored number display 125, and effect image display device 157 when the left stop button 137 or middle stop button 138 is operated by CLR operation or CRL operation. It is.

In this example, since the gaming state shifts from the standby state (first standby state) to standby state 2 (second standby state), the effect image display device 157 erases the press order effect and also Instead of a state effect, a push order failure effect (in this example, the character string "Waiting" is displayed and the background color during the push order guess is darkened (darkened) indicating that the push order guess has failed) is used. display)).

Also, LCR operation, LRC operation, CLR operation, or CRL operation in which push order bell A_RCL (or push order bell B_RCL) is internally elected and the first stop operation is an incorrect stop operation (third stop order) is performed, and if the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is press timing 1, the medals are not paid out (the first ), but if the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is press timing 2, which is different from press timing 1, as shown in FIG. medals (third value) are paid out.

According to this example, even if the transition to the second gaming state (AT state in this example) is not possible, value (in this example, one medal) may be given. It is possible to prevent players from losing their desire to play.

<Press order guessing before transition to second game state/Push order guessing failure/M+4th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T5 in FIG. 30(a) is the state where the M+4th game has started.

The game state of the M+4th game is standby state 2 (second standby state) before the transition to the AT game. In the M+4th game, the push order performance (predetermined performance) is not executed in standby state 2 (second standby state) (conditions for transition to AT state (second gaming state) are not satisfied) Therefore, the standby state 2 (second standby state) is continued.

In addition, in the M+4th game, since the push order bell (LCR), that is, the push order bell A_LCR, is internally won, the push order guess performance (predetermined performance) is not executed, but the standby state 2 (the Since the standby state (No. 2) continues, a standby state effect is executed using the effect image display device 157, as shown in (a-6) of the same figure.

<Press order guessing before transition to second game state/Press order guessing failure/M+5th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T6 in FIG. 30(a) is the state where the M+5th game has started.

The game state of the M+5th game is standby state 2 (second standby state) before the transition to the AT game. In the M+5th game, the push order performance (predetermined performance) is not executed in standby state 2 (second standby state) (conditions for transition to AT state (second gaming state) are not satisfied) Therefore, the standby state 2 (second standby state) is continued.

Furthermore, in the M+5th game, the push order guessing performance (predetermined performance) is not executed because the internal winning was lost.

<Press order guessing before transition to second game state/Push order guessing failure/M+6th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T7 in FIG. 30(a) is the state where the M+6th game has started.

In the M+6th game, since the push order bell (CRL), that is, the push order bell A_CRL or the push order bell B_CRL, has been internally won, the effect image display device 157 is displayed as shown in FIG. The button is used to perform a press order guessing effect (predetermined effect) in the same manner as the internal winning of the press order bell (RCL) and a standby state effect (in this example, display of the character string "Waiting"). There is.

In addition, in the press order guessing performance (predetermined performance) in the M+6th game, if the correct answer stop operation is performed, if the correct answer operation is performed without performing the incorrect answer operation even once (for example, The game shifts to the AT state similar to M+6th game). In other words, even if you move from the first standby state to the AT state or from the second standby state to the AT state, if you do not win in the additional lottery in the standby state, you will move to the same AT state. .

Furthermore, if an incorrect answer stop operation is performed in the press order guessing performance (predetermined performance) in the M+6th game, the standby state (second standby state) will be maintained as in the M+4th game.

Note that the AT state may be different depending on whether the first standby state is changed to the AT state or the second standby state is changed to the AT state. In this case, if the transition from the second standby state to the AT state is more disadvantageous to the player than the transition from the first standby state to the AT state, the AT state is more disadvantageous to the player. Good (just make it easy to transition). Note that an AT state that is disadvantageous to the player may be an AT state in which it is difficult to win an additional lottery, or, for example, in an AT state where a predetermined number of games have been played in one set, the player may be in an AT state in which it is difficult to win the additional lottery, or, for example, in an AT state where a predetermined number of games are played in one set, the AT state may be changed to the next set (second consecutive) AT state. It may be an AT state in which it is difficult to win the continuous lottery, an AT state in which the initial number of games (initial number of coins) in the AT state is small, or an AT state that is a combination of these states.

<Production mode of press order performance (modified example)>
Next, a performance mode (modified example) of the press order guessing performance (predetermined performance) will be described using FIGS. 31 and 32.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the flow of the standby instruction information setting process. This standby instruction information setting process is one of the processes executed by the production control process of the first sub-control unit 400 described using FIG. This is a process that controls order navigation, push order guessing effects, etc.

Specifically, in step S1001 of the standby instruction information setting process, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a standby state (first standby state) before transition to AT gaming, and if this is not the case, the , ends the standby instruction information setting process, and if applicable, proceeds to step S1002.

In step S1002, based on the command received from the main control unit 300, it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been internally selected. If the push order bell has not been internally selected, the waiting instruction information setting process is performed. If the internal winning has been completed, the process advances to step S1003.

In step S1003, in the display area of the effect image display device 157, the "x??" press order effect shown in FIG. 29 (a-3), FIG. If "x??" has already been displayed during the current standby, the process advances to step S1007, and if it has not already been displayed, the process advances to step S1004.

In step S1004, it is determined whether the won push order bell is push order bell_LCR or push order bell_LRC, and if it is push order bell_LCR or push order bell_LRC, the process advances to step S1005 and " 1??'' press order guessing performance (for example, a performance in which "1" is displayed on the left side of the display area of the performance image display device 157, and the display of "?" is swung left and right in the center and right side of the display area) While setting the instruction information for executing the press order bell_LCR or press order bell_LRC, the process advances to step S1006 and the instruction information for executing the "x??" press order guessing effect is set. Set.

In step S1007, a push order navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the push order navigation.In the next step S1008, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation lottery has been won. If there is not, the process advances to step S1004, and if the push order navigation lottery is won, the process advances to step S1009.

In step S1009, after setting instruction information for executing a push order navigation effect (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32) that suggests a stop order corresponding to the winning push order bell, a waiting instruction information setting process is performed. end.

In other words, until the "×??" press order guess effect is displayed once during this waiting period, if you win the press order bell_CLR, press order bell_CRL, press order bell_RLC, or press order bell_RCL, you will be guaranteed to win. After executing the "×??" press order performance and displaying the "×??" press order performance once during the current standby (for example, the left first After performing the stop operation), if you win the push order bell, a push order navigation lottery will be performed, and a push order navigation performance, "1??" press order guessing performance, or "x??" press order guessing performance will be performed. I'm trying to do one or the other.

In this example, in the push order navigation drawing in step S1007, the probability of executing the "x??" ("1??") press order guessing effect is higher than the probability of executing the press order navigation effect. It consists of

Further, in the push order navigation drawing in step S1007, the probability of executing the "x??" ("1??") push order guessing effect and the probability of executing the push order navigation effect may be made equal. Even in this case, until the "×??" press order guess effect is displayed once, if you win the press order bell_CLR, press order bell_CRL, press order bell_RLC, or press order bell_RCL, Since the “×??” press order guessing effect is executed, the total probability of executing the “×??” (“1??”) press order guessing effect is higher than the probability of executing the press order navigation effect. I can say that.

According to this example, the player can obtain a moderate amount of medals by following the push order navigation, so the player can not lose medals excessively and can enjoy the push order guessing performance (mini game). , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, in this example, in step S1003, it is determined whether or not the "x??" press order guess effect has already been displayed. In this case, the process may always proceed to step S1004, and either the "1??" press order guessing effect or the "×??" press order guessing effect may be executed. Regardless of whether it has been completed or not, if the push order bell is internally won, the process always advances to step S1007, where a push order navigation lottery is performed every time, a push order navigation presentation, a "1??" press order guessing presentation, Alternatively, it may be configured such that one of the "x??" press order guess effects is always executed.

Further, in this example, in step S1003, if it is determined that the "×??" press order guessing effect has been displayed, the push order navigation effect, the "1??" press order guessing effect, or the "×??" ”Although the configuration is such that any one of the press order guess effects is always executed, there may be cases where neither effect is executed.For example, if it is determined that the press order navigation is not won in step S1007, either one of the press order guess effects may be executed. It may also be configured so that no performance is performed.

Furthermore, even if a winning combination other than the push order bell (for example, a common bell) is internally won, a push order navigation effect or an "x??" press order guess effect may be performed.

<Production mode of press order guessing production (modified example)/Push order navigation production>
FIGS. 32(a) to 32(d) are diagrams showing an example of the push order navigation effect during the standby state.

For example, if the push order bell A_LCR or the push order bell B_LCR is internally won, as shown in FIG. 32(a), "1" is displayed on the left side of the display area of the effect image display device 157, and By displaying "2" in the center of the display area and displaying "3" on the right side of the display area, a push order navigation display of "123" indicating the stopping order of "left → middle → right" is performed.

In the game in which the press order navigation display of "123" is performed, if the player performs the left first stop operation (correct answer press order operation), as shown in FIG. 32(b), the left first stop By erasing the "1" display that suggests the operation, but not erasing the "2" display that suggests the middle second stop operation and the "3" display that suggests the right third stop operation, The press order navigation effect of "23", which suggests the stop order of "middle → right", continues.

In a game where the push order navigation display of "23" continues, if the player performs the second right stop operation (incorrect press order operation), as shown in FIG. 32(c), " By erasing the push order navigation display of "23", the push order navigation effect is terminated midway, and the player performs the middle third stop operation (incorrect press order operation) to stop all reels 110 to 112. Press order navigation will not be executed until

On the other hand, although not shown in the figure, in a game where the push order navigation display of "23" continues, if the player performs the middle second stop operation (correct answer press order operation), the middle second stop operation By erasing the "2" display suggesting the right stop operation, but not erasing the "3" display suggesting the right third stop operation, the "3" push order navigation effect suggests the "right" stop order. Continue. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that when the player performs the middle second stop operation (correct answer press order operation), the press order navigation display of "23" is erased.

In addition, in games that use such a push order navigation display or a "1??" push order guessing effect, regardless of the player's stop operation (whether it is a correct stop operation or an incorrect stop operation), ), the gaming state is configured not to shift to the AT state (second gaming state).

According to this example, depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second gaming state. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of being able to shift to the second gaming state by his own stop operation, and to increase his desire to play even after shifting to the second gaming state.

Note that the "operation order presentation that notifies all the operation orders of a plurality of stop operation means" according to the present invention is not limited to the push order navigation shown in FIG. 32(a), for example, "left → middle → right" Alternatively, before the first stop operation, only the navigation that suggests the first stop operation (for example, a display or voice saying "left") is executed, and after the first stop operation From then on, before the second stop operation, only the navigation that suggests the second stop operation (for example, a display or voice saying "Middle") is executed, and after the second stop operation and before the third stop operation, the third stop operation is executed. Only the suggested navigation (for example, a display or voice saying "right") may be executed.

<Production mode of press order guessing performance (modified example) / press order guessing performance>
FIGS. 32(e) to 32(f) and (f') are diagrams showing an example of the "x??" pressing order guess effect.

For example, when the push order bell_CLR, push order bell_CRL, push order bell_RLC, or push order bell_RCL is internally won, as shown in FIG. 32(e), the display area of the effect image display device 157 is By displaying an "x" on the left side and displaying "?" in the center and right side of the display area that swings from side to side, the third operation order (LCR operation where the first stop operation is on the left) is displayed. or LRC operation), and suggests that the first operation order (RCL operation or RLC operation with the first stop operation on the right) or the second operation order (CLR operation with the first stop operation on the right) is not recommended. A performance of guessing the order in which you press the "x??" button is performed, which suggests that a CRL operation (or CRL operation) is recommended.

In a game where this “×??” press order guessing performance is executed, if the player performs the first stop operation, regardless of whether the first stop is correct or incorrect (regardless of the order of presses) ), as shown in FIG. 32(f), the display of "x??" is erased, and the pressing order navigation performance of "x??" is ended.

According to this example, it is possible to notify the player when the stop operation turns out to be an incorrect answer, and it is possible to avoid excessively arousing expectations for a correct answer.

Note that the "predetermined effect for causing the player to select the order of operation of the plurality of stop operation means" according to the present invention is not limited to the effect of guessing the pressing order of "x??", but for example, the above-mentioned "1" ??”, that is, a presentation for making the user select the second stop operation and the third stop operation, or a presentation for making the user select the first stop operation and the third stop operation (e.g. , ``2??''), or a presentation for selecting the first stop operation and the second stop operation (for example, a press that displays ``?3?''). It may be a performance for selecting the first left stop operation or the first middle stop operation (for example, a press order performance that displays "??×"). However, it may be an effect for causing the user to select the first left stop operation or the first right stop operation (for example, a press order guess effect that displays "?x?").

Furthermore, if the player performs an operation in the correct pressing order (for example, the first stop operation in the middle), as shown in FIG. On the other hand, if the player performs an incorrect pressing order operation (in this example, the left first stop operation), the display of "x??" is erased, as shown in (f') in the same figure. In addition, in order to suggest that the operation is an incorrect pressing order, the background color of the display area of the effect image display device 157 is changed from a first background color (for example, white) to a second background color (for example, gray).

Incidentally, at the time point (f) in the same figure, as shown in (h) in the same figure, an effect may be performed in which a display including the character string "Ready" is displayed.

Note that the manner in which it is suggested that the operation is in an incorrect pressing order is not limited to this example; for example, in addition to (or in place of) a change in the background color, the text "Please perform the stop operation according to the display" It is possible to display the rows, output a sound from the speaker that indicates an incorrect pressing order (for example, a "boo-boo" sound), or make a "x??" It is also possible to simply erase the display.

On the other hand, if the player performs an incorrect press order operation (in this example, the left first stop operation) in a game where the press order effect of "×??" is executed, the game state will be changed to a disadvantage. The system is configured to transition (or may transition) to a standby state. Here, "unfavorable waiting state" refers to, for example, a waiting state in which the probability of winning a lottery such as an additional lottery is lower than that in an advantageous waiting state, or a waiting state in which a lottery such as an additional lottery is relatively disadvantageous. This includes a standby state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to a standby state that is advantageous if it is not performed.

In addition, in a game where the "x??" press order guessing effect is being executed, if the player performs a correct press order operation (for example, a middle first stop operation), a lottery such as an additional lottery will be performed. In this case, it may be configured such that a similar lottery such as an additional lottery is performed in both an unfavorable standby state and an advantageous standby state, or in an unfavorable standby state, a lottery is performed in an advantageous standby state. It may be configured to perform a lottery such as an additional lottery that is relatively disadvantageous in comparison, or it may be configured such that a lottery such as an additional lottery is not performed.

In addition, in a game where the press order guessing effect of "1??" In a game where sequential navigation performance is being performed, even if the player performs an incorrect push order operation (a stop operation that does not follow the push order navigation), the game is configured so that it does not shift to a disadvantageous standby state. Good too.

In games where the push order navigation display or the "1??" push order guessing effect is performed, the game state is displayed regardless of the player's stop operation (whether it is a correct stop operation or an incorrect stop operation). Since the configuration is such that it does not shift to the AT state (second gaming state), the standby state is not extended, so even if the player performs an incorrect release press order operation, the player will not be disadvantaged. By configuring the game not to shift to a standby state, it is possible to prevent a player who makes a mistake in operation from losing his or her desire to play.

On the other hand, when performing the "×??" press order guessing effect, it is possible to prolong the waiting state by intentionally performing an incorrect press order operation, and there is a possibility of fraud. It is preferable to transition to a disadvantageous standby state.

FIGS. 32(g) to 32(j) are diagrams showing an example in which a "7" aim display is performed after the "x??" press order guess effect.

In a game in which the "x??" press order guessing effect shown in FIG. If the stop operation has been performed, a correct press order effect indicating that the stop operation was performed in the correct press order (in this example, a display including the character string "Ready Completed" is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157) At the same time, the game state can be shifted to the AT state (second game state).

According to this example, depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second gaming state. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of being able to shift to the second gaming state by his own stop operation, and to increase his desire to play even after shifting to the second gaming state.

Further, by notifying a part of the incorrect press order, it is possible to prevent the press order guessing performance (mini-game) from becoming too difficult, and it is possible to moderately entertain the player.

The "second gaming state" according to the present invention is not limited to the AT state, but includes the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, and pseudo bonus. etc. may be used.

In addition, in this example, in a game where the "x??" press order guess effect is being performed, even if the player continues the left first stop operation (incorrect press order operation), the specified number of times (For example, when the 50th press order effect of "x??" is executed, even if the player performs the left first stop operation (incorrect press order operation), the game It is configured to shift the state to an AT state (second gaming state). It goes without saying that the prescribed number of times is not limited to 50 times.

According to this example, by providing relief measures when the player is unable to perform the correct press order operation, it is possible to prevent the press order guessing performance (mini game) from becoming too difficult, and the game can entertain people to a moderate degree.

The state shown in FIG. 32(i) is a state in which the "7" aim display is started in the next game after executing the correct press order effect shown in FIG. 32(h).

In this example, when the player performs a stop operation in a game in which this "7" aiming display is executed, the combination of "7 1" symbols will not line up on the predetermined winning line 114 of the symbol display window 113. Even if the game state is changed to the AT state (second game state).

Note that the game in which the "7" aim display is executed is a pseudo game, and the combination of "7 1" symbols is always displayed on the predetermined winning line 114 of the symbol display window 113, regardless of the player's stop operation. It may be configured so that the symbols line up (by controlling the reels), or if the combination of "Seven 1" symbols is not aligned due to the player's stop operation, the game state is AT state (second game state). It may be configured so that the transition does not occur. Furthermore, the performance of guessing the pressing order of "x??" itself may be a pseudo-game, for example, it may be configured so that the symbol combinations corresponding to the correct stopping operations are aligned regardless of the player's stopping operations (pressing order). good.

In addition, although we have shown an example where the "7" aim display is displayed after the "×??" press order effect, it is also possible to perform a direction that suggests aiming at other symbols, or without performing any other direction. , it may shift to the AT state (second gaming state), or it may shift to the AT state (second gaming state) after moving to another gaming state.

<Production mode of press order guessing production (modified example 2)>
Regarding the push order bells A and B explained using FIG. 28, if the push order bell A is won, the push order navigation is executed, and if the push order bell B is won, the "x??" button is pressed. It may be configured to perform an order guessing effect, and in this case, the probability of executing the "x??" press order guessing effect (the probability of winning push order bell B (for example, 1/5)) is It is preferable that the probability of executing the navigation effect is higher than the probability of winning the push order bell A (for example, 1/10).

According to this example, the player can obtain a moderate amount of medals by following the push order navigation, so the player can not lose medals excessively and can enjoy the push order guessing performance (mini game). , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

In addition, the correct pressing order in a game in which the press order guessing performance of "×??" When _CLR and push order bell _CRL are internally selected, the middle first stop operation is selected, but the correct push order may be the right first stop operation and the middle first stop operation.

Therefore, for example, in a game in which the pressing order guessing performance of "x???" If the player performs an incorrect press order operation (left first stop operation), the player does not move to the AT state (second game state) and performs a correct press order operation (middle first stop operation or right first stop operation). 1 stop operation) is performed, the system may be configured to shift to the AT state (second gaming state).

In addition, the configuration is such that the transition to the AT state (second gaming state) does not occur unless all the pressing orders are correct, that is, the transition to the AT state (second gaming state) occurs only when all the pressing orders are correct. You may.

Furthermore, the "second gaming state" according to the present invention may be composed of a plurality of gaming states with different advantages (for example, pseudo bonuses with different rates of transition to AT, AT with different initial games, etc.). In the case of a first win, it may be configured such that the waiting state is always passed through, regardless of which gaming state (for example, a pseudo bonus with a different rate of transition to AT).

<Predicting the push order/summary before transitioning to the second gaming state>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. to 112), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. based on the lottery information, a stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4) that stops the plurality of reels, and an internal winning result determination means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. A first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2), the gaming state is a first gaming state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8(a) (non-advantageous section normal state, advantageous section normal state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance) zone, ending state, pseudo-bonus, etc.), and a first standby state (for example, the standby state shown in FIG. 30), and the production means is configured to perform a game when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. In this case, a predetermined effect (for example, FIG. 30(a-3) ), and the certain condition is such that the result of the internal winning is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, In the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case, the game state control means performs the first operation. means for shifting the gaming state from the first standby state to the second gaming state when the stop operation means is operated in a mode (for example, RLC operation or RCL operation in which the first stop operation is right); Yes, in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode (for example, a CLR operation or a CRL operation in which the first stop operation is inside), The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine does not shift the gaming state from the first standby state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means, the first standby state may or may not shift to the second gaming state. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation, and can maintain the player's desire to play even after the transition to the second gaming state. can be increased.

Further, the gaming state includes a second standby state (for example, standby state 2 shown in FIG. 33), and the gaming state control means controls the game state in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed. When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, the game mode may be a means for shifting the gaming state from the first standby state to the second standby state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she was unable to shift to the second gaming state due to the player's own stop operation, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

In other words, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. ), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), , a stop control means for stopping the plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on the lottery information (for example, the winning prize shown in FIG. 4). a winning combination internal lottery process), a gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state (for example, the gaming state control processing shown in FIG. 4), and a presentation means for executing the presentation (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, FIG. A first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, In addition to the ending state, the above-mentioned The production means is configured to tell the player how to operate the plurality of stop operation means (e.g., the order in which they are pressed and the symbols to be stopped (symbols to aim for)) when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. It is a means that can execute a predetermined effect for making a selection (for example, the press order guess effect shown in FIG. 30(a-3)), and the certain condition is such that the result of the internal winning is the first result (for example, , push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), and the game state control means In a game in which the predetermined effect is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (for example, RLC operation or RCL operation in which the first stop operation is right), the game state is changed to the first operation mode. means capable of shifting to a second game state, and in a game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, a second operation mode (for example, a CLR operation or a CRL operation in which the first stop operation is inside); The gaming machine is characterized in that when the stop operating means is operated, the gaming machine can shift to the second standby state without shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware that he was unable to shift to the second gaming state due to his own stop operation, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Further, the certain condition includes a case where the result of the internal winning is a second result (for example, push order bell A_CLR, push order bell A_CRL, push order bell B_CLR, push order bell B_CRL), does not include the case where the result is a third result (for example, push order bell A_LCR, push order bell A_LRC), and the first result is when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, The display mode of the plurality of reels can be a predetermined display mode, and the second result is that when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display mode of the plurality of reels is The display mode can be a predetermined display mode, and the third result is that the plurality of When the stop operation means is operated, the display mode of the plurality of reels can become a predetermined display mode, and the predetermined effect is an effect suggesting that the third operation mode is not recommended. and displaying an effect suggesting that the first operation mode or the second operation mode is recommended (for example, displaying an "x" on the left side of the display area of the effect image display device 157, and displaying an effect image) This may be an effect in which the display of "?" is swung from side to side in the center and right side of the display area of the device 157.

With such a configuration, the player can stop using the first operation mode (operation order) or the second operation mode (operation order) without having the player perform the stop operation using the third operation mode (operation order). You can have the player perform operations and be guided to recommended games.

Further, the probability that the result of the internal winning will be the third result (for example, 20%) is lower than the probability that the result of the internal winning will be the first result (for example, 40%), and the result of the internal winning will be the first result. The probability of the third result (for example, 20%) may be lower than the probability of the second result (for example, 40%).

With such a configuration, by creating an effect that suggests that the third operation mode (operation order) is not recommended, and by not allowing the player to perform the stop operation in the third operation order, the internal lottery It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the proportion of the third result as a result of the third result is small.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels; A stop control means for stopping a plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on lottery information (for example, the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 4) (lottery processing), a gaming state control means (for example, the gaming state control processing shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state, and a presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 2) that executes the presentation. A first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, etc.), the gaming state is a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section shown in FIG. 8(a), a normal state, advantageous section normal state) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, special zone, pullback chance zone, ending state) , a pseudo bonus, etc.), a first standby state (for example, the standby state shown in FIG. 30), and a second standby state (for example, the standby state 2 shown in FIG. 33); allows the player to select the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation means (e.g., the order in which they are pressed, the symbol to be the target to stop (the symbol to aim for)) when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. 30(a-3), FIG. 32(e), etc.), and the certain condition is such that the result of the internal winning is the first one. (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the gaming state control means , in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (for example, RLC operation or RCL operation in which the first stop operation is right), the Means that can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, the second operation mode (for example, CLR in which the first stop operation is inside) When the stop operation means is operated by the above-mentioned operation or CRL operation), the means is capable of shifting the gaming state to the second standby state without shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the predetermined production. , a certain display informing that a certain operation mode (for example, left first stop operation) is not recommended (for example, " ? '' display).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased. In addition, it is possible to make the player aware that he was unable to shift to the second gaming state due to his own stop operation, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Further, the certain operation mode may be an operation mode in which the game state does not shift to the second game state but shifts to the second standby state in a game in which the predetermined performance is executed. good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect from becoming too difficult by notifying a part of the incorrect press order, and to moderately entertain the player.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels; A stop control means for stopping a plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on lottery information (for example, the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 4) (lottery processing), a gaming state control means (for example, the gaming state control processing shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state, and a value giving means (for example, the one shown in FIG. 4) that gives value (for example, medals, number information). A game that includes a medal payout process, etc.) and a performance means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2) that executes the performance. The gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section normal state and an advantageous section normal state shown in FIG. 8(a)) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.) and the first standby state (for example, the first standby state shown in FIG. 30). and a standby state), and the presentation means controls the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation means (for example, the order of pressing, the pattern to be stopped, etc.) when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. It is a means that can execute a predetermined effect (for example, the press order guessing effect shown in FIG. 30(a-3)) for making the player select (the symbol to aim for), and the certain condition is the internal winning (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), including the case where the result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), The state control means changes the game state to the first state when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode (for example, RLC operation) in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. Means for transitioning from the standby state to the second game state, and in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, the second operation mode (for example, LRC operation, RCL operation, CLR operation, CRL When the stop operation means is operated in (operation), the gaming state is not shifted from the first standby state to the second gaming state, and the value adding means is a means for not shifting the gaming state from the first standby state to the second gaming state, In the game in which the performance is executed, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation mode, it is a means for giving a first value (for example, 9 medals), and in the first case. The game machine is characterized in that, in a game in which the predetermined performance is executed, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode, the first value is not given.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased.

Further, in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in a third operation mode (for example, RCL operation), the game state control means means for shifting the state from the first standby state to the second gaming state; When the plurality of stop operation means are operated, the means gives a second value (for example, one medal), and even if the first value is greater than the second value, good.

With such a configuration, not only when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode (stop order) but also in the third operation mode (stop order), the game shifts to the second gaming state. To prevent the difficulty level of guessing the push order from becoming too high, to prevent a decline in the player's desire to play, and to prevent the push order guessing performance from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. In addition, by creating a difference in the value given in the order of the stop operations that transition to the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a new game experience that has not been seen before, and increase the interest of players. Can be done.

In other words, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. ), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of the plurality of reels, and a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), , a stop control means for stopping the plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on the lottery information (for example, the winning prize shown in FIG. 4). A game state control means (for example, the game state control process shown in FIG. 4) that controls the game state (for example, the game state control process shown in FIG. 4), and a value giving means for giving value (for example, medals, number information) (for example, FIG. 4 (such as the medal payout process shown in FIG. 1), and presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2) for executing the presentation. The gaming machine is a gaming machine in which the gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section normal state and an advantageous section normal state shown in FIG. 8(a)) and a gaming state more advantageous than the first gaming state. The second gaming state (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.) and the first standby state (for example, the and a standby state shown in FIG. It is a means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a press order guessing effect shown in FIG. 30(a-3)) for causing a player to select a symbol (a target symbol), and the certain condition is Including cases where the internal winning result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL) (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), The game state control means changes the game state to the first state when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode (for example, RLC operation) in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. In the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, the means is capable of shifting to a second game state, and in the second operation mode (for example, LRC operation, RCL operation, CLR operation, CRL operation). When the stop operation means is operated, the game state is not shifted to the second game state, and in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, the third operation mode (for example, RCL When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in (operation), the gaming state is a means capable of shifting to the second gaming state, and the value imparting means executes the predetermined performance in the first case. In the game, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation mode, it is a means for giving a first value (for example, 9 medals), and the predetermined performance in the first case is In a game in which the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode, the first value is not imparted, and the predetermined effect in the first case is executed. , when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation mode, a second value (for example, one medal) is provided, and the first value is equal to the second value. This is a game machine that is characterized by greater value.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased. In addition, if the stop operation is performed not only in the first operation mode (stop order) but also in the third operation mode (stop order), the second game state will be entered, so the difficulty of guessing the push order will be increased. To prevent a player's desire to play from decreasing by preventing the value from becoming too high, and to prevent a press order guessing performance from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. In addition, by creating a difference in the value given in the order of the stop operations that transition to the second gaming state, it is possible to provide a new game experience that has not been seen before, and increase the interest of players. Can be done.

Further, in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case, when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode, the value giving means is configured to provide a third value (for example, medals) when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode. 1), and the third value may be smaller than the first value.

With such a configuration, even if it is not possible to shift to the second gaming state, value may be added, thereby preventing the player's desire to play from decreasing.

Further, the gaming state includes a second standby state (for example, standby state 2 shown in FIG. 33), and the gaming state control means controls the game state in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed. When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode, the gaming state is transferred from the first standby state to the second standby state, and the second standby state is the first standby state. The state may be less advantageous than the standby state.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that he/she was unable to shift to the second gaming state due to the player's own stop operation, and it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing. Furthermore, if the degree of advantage of the second standby state is high, there is a concern that the second standby state will be delayed; however, by making the degree of advantage of the second standby state lower than that of the first standby state, It is possible to prevent the second standby state from being prolonged.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels; A stop control means for stopping a plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on lottery information (for example, the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 4) (lottery processing), a gaming state control means (for example, the gaming state control processing shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state, and a value giving means (for example, the one shown in FIG. 4) that gives value (for example, medals, number information). A game that includes a medal payout process, etc.) and a performance means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2) that executes the performance. The gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section normal state and an advantageous section normal state shown in FIG. 8(a)) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.) and the first standby state (for example, the first standby state shown in FIG. 30). and a standby state), and the presentation means controls the operation mode of the plurality of stop operation means (for example, the order of pressing, the pattern to be stopped, etc.) when a certain condition is satisfied in the first standby state. It is a means that can execute a predetermined effect (for example, the press order guessing effect shown in FIG. 30(a-3)) for making the player select (the symbol to aim for), and the certain condition is the internal winning (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), including the case where the result is the first result (for example, push order bell A_RLC, push order bell A_RCL, push order bell B_RLC, push order bell B_RCL) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), The state control means changes the game state to the second state when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode (for example, RLC operation) in the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the first case. A means capable of transitioning to a gaming state, and in a game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, the stop operation is performed in a second operation mode (for example, LRC operation, RCL operation, CLR operation, CRL operation). The means does not shift the gaming state to the second gaming state when the means is operated, and in the game in which the predetermined effect in the first case is executed, a third operation mode (for example, RCL operation) When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first case, the gaming state is a means that can shift to the second gaming state, and the value adding means is a means that can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state, and the value adding means is a means that can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state, and the value adding means When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the first operation mode, the means is capable of imparting a first value (for example, 9 medals), and the predetermined effect in the first case is executed. When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the second operation mode in the game, the means can give a second value (for example, one medal), and the predetermined effect in the first case is When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the third operation mode in a game in which the second value (for example, one medal) can be awarded, the first value is: The game machine is characterized in that the value is greater than the second value.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased. In addition, if the stop operation is performed not only in the first operation mode (stop order) but also in the third operation mode (stop order), the second game state will be entered, so the difficulty of guessing the push order will be increased. To prevent a player's desire to play from decreasing by preventing the value from becoming too high, and to prevent a press order guessing performance from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. Furthermore, even if the game fails to transition to an advantageous state, it may give the same value as when the game transitions to an advantageous state, thereby making it possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) capable of performing a stop operation for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of reels; A stop control means for stopping a plurality of reels (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4), and an internal winning result determining means for determining the internal winning result based on lottery information (for example, the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 4) (lottery processing), a gaming state control means (for example, the gaming state control processing shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state, and a value giving means (for example, the one shown in FIG. 4) that gives value (for example, medals, number information). A game that includes a medal payout process, etc.) and a performance means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc. shown in FIG. 2) that executes the performance. The gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section normal state and an advantageous section normal state shown in FIG. 8(a)) and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. (for example, the normal AT state shown in FIG. 8(a), CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone, ending state, pseudo bonus, etc.) and the first standby state (for example, the first standby state shown in FIG. 30). a standby state), and the presentation means is configured to perform the plurality of operations when the result of the internal winning is a first result in the first standby state (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). When executing a predetermined effect for making the player select the order of operation of the stop operation means (for example, the effect of guessing the order of pressing "x??" shown in FIG. 30(a-3) and FIG. 32(e)) , when executing an operation order effect (for example, a push order navigation effect shown in FIG. 32(a)) that informs the operation order of the plurality of stop operation means, and the game state control means In the game in which the predetermined effect is executed in the case of , when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (for example, RLC operation), the means that can shift the gaming state to the second gaming state. Yes, in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode (for example, LRC operation, RCL operation, CLR operation, CRL operation), the game Means for not shifting the state to the second game state, and in the game in which the operation order effect in the first case is executed, the stop is performed in the operation order (for example, LCR operation) notified by the operation order effect. When the operating means is operated, the gaming state is not shifted to the second gaming state, and the value imparting means is a means for not shifting the gaming state to the second gaming state when the operating means is operated. When the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the above-mentioned mode, it is a means that can give a first value (for example, 9 medals), and in the game in which the predetermined performance in the first case is executed, the second If the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the order of operation, the means does not give the first value, and in the game in which the operation order effect in the first case is executed, the operation order effect is notified. The gaming machine is characterized in that when the plurality of stop operation means are operated in the same order of operation, the means can impart the first value.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the first standby state may or may not shift from the first standby state to the second play state depending on the operation mode (operation order) of the stop operation means. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction of having been able to transition to the second gaming state by his or her own stop operation. can be increased. In addition, if the stop operation is performed not only in the first operation mode (stop order) but also in the third operation mode (stop order), the second game state will be entered, so the difficulty of guessing the push order will be increased. To prevent a player's desire to play from decreasing by preventing the value from becoming too high, and to prevent a press order guessing performance from becoming a troublesome performance for the player. In addition, even if a predetermined effect is executed in the first standby state and the operations cannot be performed in the correct press order, the operation order effect may be executed in the first standby state. You can play the game without drastically reducing the game value (medals).

Further, the first operation order and the operation order notified in the operation order presentation in the first case may be the same operation order.

<Display of amount of value acquired>
Next, the display of the amount of acquired value will be explained using FIG. 33. FIGS. 33(a) to 33(g) are diagrams showing an example of displaying the amount of acquired value in chronological order.

As explained using FIG. 24(a) and the like, in the slot machine according to the present example, in a certain gaming state (for example, AT state), the number of games display (for example, It is possible to display the amount of value (e.g., medals) obtained (e.g., the number of G remaining at AT) and the amount of value (e.g., medals) obtained (e.g., the number of obtained pieces). It is configured to be able to display a display of the number of awarded games (for example, an AT additional G number display) indicating the number of awarded games.

The state shown in FIG. 33(a) is a state where the final game of the AT game has started.

In the same state, at the upper left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a level display indicating the player's gaming level (in this example, a character string "Lv. At the top right of the display area, the number of medals acquired (in this example, the string "1000" is displayed) is displayed, and at the center of the display area, the AT A display indicating that it is the final game of the game (in this example, an image including the character string "Last") is displayed.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(b) is a state in which the final game of the AT game has ended and the AT end effect AE has started.

In the same state, the AT end indicating that the AT state will end is triggered by the fulfillment of the start condition for the AT end effect (in this example, the third stop operation was performed in the final game of the AT game). Production AE has started. Note that the start conditions for the AT end effect are not limited to this example, and include, for example, that the winning determination has been completed in the final game of the AT game, that the medals have been paid out in the final game of the AT game, and that the AT game has ended. It may also be the fact that the production of the AT game has ended in the final game.

The AT end effect AE of this example includes one or more displays (for example, background image BG, acquired display image GP, blessing display SP, character image CP, dialogue display JP, etc.) displayed using the liquid crystal display device 157, , one or more output sounds (for example, sound effect BS, etc.) output from the speakers 272 and 277. Note that in place of (or in addition to) the display and output sound, effects may be provided using lamps, movable bodies, or the like.

The background image BG constituting the AT end effect AE is displayed at the backmost part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 and is an image that serves as the background of the effect. The display mode is different. For example, if the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of an AT game is 1000 or more, a blue background image BG is displayed, and if the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of an AT game is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, A yellow background image BG is displayed, and if the number of acquired coins at the end of the final game of the AT game is 2001 or more, a red background image is displayed.

Additionally, the background image BG may function as a setting suggestion image that suggests the current setting value. For example, if the current setting value is setting 5 or higher, it suggests that the setting value is setting 5 or higher. A setting suggestion image (for example, an image containing the text strings such as "Setting 5 or more confirmed" or "Setting 5 or more may be possible?") is displayed in the background image BG, and if the current setting value is an odd number, the setting A setting suggestion image suggesting that the value is an odd number (for example, an image including a character string "Is the setting value an odd number?") is displayed as being included in the background image BG.

These are the acquired display image GP and blessing display SP that constitute the AT end performance AE, and the "specific images" according to the present invention. It consists of animations (video images) that step-by-step display the number of coins earned at the end of the final game.

Note that the "specific image" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and includes, for example, a certain gaming state (non-advantageous section normal state, advantageous section normal state, normal AT state, CZ, specialized zone, pullback chance zone , an ending state, a pseudo-bonus, etc.) may be a certain image displayed at the end of a game (e.g., ending state, pseudo-bonus, etc.).

Furthermore, the image is not limited to the image that includes the number of coins obtained at the end of the final game of the AT game, but for example, if it is a certain image that is displayed at the end of a certain game state (specialized zone), the image that includes the number of coins obtained at the end of the final game of the AT game, The image may include a display of the number of games newly awarded (for example, a display of the number of AT extra Gs) indicating the number of games newly awarded in the specialized zone. Alternatively, it may be an image that includes numerical values or character strings indicating newly awarded points, items, rights, etc. in a certain gaming state.

Also, for example, when a production is displayed during a game for the first time, it is displayed with an animation, but it is displayed again after a menu is displayed by pressing a button or after a demo production that transitions due to not playing for a certain period of time is finished. In some cases, it may be displayed without animation.

The blessing display SP that constitutes the AT end effect AE consists of an animation display (video display) that displays symbols (character strings, symbols, etc.) in a stepwise enlarged manner over a predetermined period of time. In this case, the display mode differs depending on the number of coins obtained at the end of the final game of the AT game.

FIG. 33(h) is a diagram showing an example of the symbols forming the blessing display SP, the number of acquired coins corresponding to each symbol, the initial display time, and the re-display time.

For example, if the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of an AT game is 1000 coins or less, when displaying the blessing display SP for the first time, the character string "Cool" is displayed for 0.99 seconds (30 frames) (0. Perform an animation display (video display) that enlarges step by step (taking 99 seconds), and when displaying it again, display the character string "Cool" (still image) for 33ms (1 frame) (33ms time). display). In addition, if the number of acquired coins is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, when displaying the blessing display SP for the first time, the character string "Excellent" is displayed for 1.65s (50 frames). Perform an animation display (video display) that enlarges step by step (over 1 frame), and when redisplaying, display the string "Excellent" (still image) for 33ms (1 frame) (over a period of 33ms) do.

In addition, when the number of acquired coins is 2001 or more, when displaying the blessing display SP for the first time, the character string "Unbelievable" is displayed for 2.31 seconds (70 frames) (over a period of 2.31 seconds). An animation display (moving image display) that enlarges step by step is performed, and when redisplaying, the character string "Unbelievable" (still image) is displayed for 33 ms (one frame) (over a period of 33 ms).

That is, in this example, the symbol and the first display time (playback time of animation display (moving image display)) are configured to be different depending on the type of blessing display SP, but the redisplay time (display of still image) is configured to be different. time) is set to the same time (33 ms (1 frame)). Furthermore, the time required to redisplay the blessing display SP (in this example, 33ms (1 frame)) is set to be shorter than the minimum time required to display the blessing display SP for the first time (in this example, 0.99s). , so that the redisplay time is not longer than necessary.

The sound effect BS constituting the AT end effect AE is the output sound output from the speakers 272, 277 together with the blessing display SP, and in this example, it is the same as the blessing display SP explained using FIG. 33(h). , the output mode differs depending on the number of coins obtained at the end of the final game of the AT game.

For example, if the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of an AT game is 1000 coins or less, when displaying the blessing display SP for the first time, the sound "Cool" is repeatedly output for 0.99 seconds as the sound effect BS, When redisplaying, the sound effect BS is not output. In addition, if the number of acquired coins is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the sound "Excellent" will be output repeatedly for 1.65 seconds as the sound effect BS, and when it is displayed again, , sound effect BS is not output.

In addition, when the number of acquired pieces is 2001 or more, when the blessing display SP is displayed for the first time, the sound "Unbelievable" is output repeatedly for 2.31 seconds as the sound effect BS, and when it is displayed again, the sound effect is BS is not output. That is, in this example, the initial output time is configured to be different depending on the type of sound effect SP, but the re-output time is set to be the same time (0 seconds, not output). Note that the sound effect BS may be one that is output during at least a part of the animation display of the blessing display SP.

The character image CP and dialogue display JP that constitute the AT end effect AE are displays to enhance the effect of the AT end effect AE, and the display form is not particularly limited, but like the blessing display SP, the AT game The display mode may be different depending on the number of coins obtained at the end of the final game.

Therefore, for example, regarding the character image CP, if the number of acquired pieces at the end of the final game of the AT game is 1000 or less, the character image of the lord is displayed, and if the number of acquired pieces is 1001 or more and 2000 or less, the character image is displayed. , a character image of an old man may be displayed, and if the number of acquired images is 2001 or more, a character image of a princess may be displayed.

In addition, regarding dialogue display JP, if the number of coins acquired at the end of the final game of AT gaming is 1000 or less, the character string "Congratulations!!" will be displayed, and if the number of coins acquired is 1001 or more and 2000 or less If the number of acquired coins is 2001 or more, the character string "Over 1000 coins!!" may be displayed. If the number of acquired coins is 2001 or more, the character string "Over 2000 coins!!" may be displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 33(c) is a state in which the acquired display image GP is displayed in the first AT end effect AE.

In the slot machine according to this example, when displaying a specific image at the first timing (a certain timing in the display period of the end image that suggests ending the AT state), the first timing, which is longer than the second time, is displayed. The specific image is displayed over a period of time (for example, the specific image is displayed with animation).

In the state shown in FIG. 6(c), since the acquired display image GP (specific image) is displayed during the display period of the first AT end effect AE (end image that suggests ending the AT state), the same After starting to display the character image CP (still image) and line display JP (still image) at the timing shown in Figure (b), at the subsequent timing shown in Figure (c), the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP The animation display of and the output of the sound effect BS are started, and the acquired display image GP and the blessing display are displayed until the conditions for starting the redisplay of the AT end effect AE are satisfied (in this example, until the operation using the effect button 192 is performed). By continuing to display the SP animation and output the sound effect BS, the acquired display image GP (specific image) is displayed with the animation.

The state shown in FIG. 3(e) is a state in which the display start animation of the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP has ended.

After the display start animation of the acquired display image GP and blessing display SP ends, the last display of the animation display of the acquired display image GP and blessing display SP continues to be displayed as a still image. Note that even after the display start animation ends, instead of a still image, the image may be displayed as an animation in which the image shakes or has an effect added. Even in this case, the time relationship of the display start animation is preferably as shown in FIG. 33(h).

Note that the AT end effect AE may be executed repeatedly until the redisplay start/end condition is satisfied (until the operation using the effect button 192 is performed), or after it is executed once, the acquired display image GP and the blessing are displayed. The animation display of the display SP may be maintained in the final display, and the output of the sound effect BS may be stopped. Further, although an example has been shown in which both the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP are displayed as animations, either one may be a still image and only the other may be displayed as an animation.

The state shown in FIG. 33(f) is a state in which the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP are erased (the character image CP, dialogue display JP, and background image BG continue to be displayed).

In the same state, since the conditions for ending the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP are satisfied (in this example, the operation using the effect button 192 was performed), the first acquired display image GP shown in FIG. The blessing display SP display has been erased.

Note that the conditions for ending the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP are not limited to this example, and include, for example, that an operation is performed using an operating means other than the effect button 192 (for example, a menu button), and that the AT end effect AE is performed. It may also be that a predetermined time has passed since the start.

According to this example, since the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP, which are obstructive when viewing the background image BG, can be erased by the player's own operation, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the slot machine according to this example, when displaying a specific image at a second timing (a certain timing in the display period of the end image that suggests ending the AT state) after the first timing, , the specific image is displayed over a second time period shorter than the first time period (the specific image is displayed without animation).

In the state shown in (g) of the same figure, when the effect button 192 is operated while the character image CP (still image) and dialogue display JP (still image) shown in (f) of the same figure are displayed, By displaying the acquired display image GP (still image) and blessing display SP (still image) each for 33 ms (1 frame) without outputting sound effect BS, it is possible to display the acquired display image GP (still image) and blessing display SP (still image) for 33 ms (1 frame) without outputting specific sounds and without accompanying animation. The acquired display image GP (specific image) is displayed.

According to this example, when redisplaying a specific image (in this example, acquired display image GP), the specific image is displayed over a second period of time that is shorter than the first period of time (for example, an animation is displayed). By displaying the specific image without accompanying information, it is possible to reduce the annoyance to the player and prevent a decline in his or her desire to play.

Furthermore, when displaying a specific image (in this example, acquired display image GP) without animation, a specific sound (in this example, sound effect GP) is not output, thereby reducing the annoyance caused to the player. This can prevent a decline in the desire to play.

Although this example shows an example in which neither the acquired display image GP nor the blessing display SP is displayed in animation, the "specific image" according to the present invention may be a still image, and the other displays may be displayed in animation. . Further, the conditions for starting the redisplay of the "specific image" according to the present invention are not limited to this example, and include, for example, an operation using an operation means other than the production button 192 (for example, a menu button), It may be that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the end effect AE.

<Display/Summary of value acquired>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) can display a specific image (for example, the acquired display image GP and the blessing display SP shown in FIG. 33(c)). The specific image is displayed at a first timing (for example, during the execution of the first AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 33(c)), and at a corresponding display means. The display may be displayed at a second timing later than the first timing (for example, during execution of the second AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 33(g)), and the display means may display the When displaying the specific image at the first timing, the specific image is displayed for a first time (for example, 2.31s, 1.65s, 0.99s), and the specific image is displayed at the second timing. When displaying a specific image, the specific image is displayed over a second period of time (for example, 33 ms), and the second period of time is shorter than the first period of time. be.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when redisplaying a specific image, the specific image is displayed over a second time period shorter than the first time (for example, the specific image is displayed without animation). By displaying images), it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused to players, and it is possible to prevent a decline in their desire to play.

Further, the sound output means is provided with a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277) capable of outputting sound, and when displaying the specific image at the first timing, the sound output means is configured to output sound at least one time during the first time. In the case where a specific sound (for example, sound effect BS) is output during the second period and the specific image is displayed without animation at the second timing, the specific sound may not be output.

With such a configuration, by not outputting a specific sound when displaying a specific image without accompanying animation, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused to the player and prevent a decline in the desire to play. .

Further, it is possible to perform a stop operation to individually stop the rotation of a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and the rotation of the plurality of reels. A plurality of possible stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a stop control means for stopping the plurality of reels based on the stop operation (for example, a reel stop control process shown in FIG. 4) ), an internal winning result determining means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 4) that determines the result of the internal winning based on the lottery information, and a gaming state control means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 4) that controls the gaming state. a gaming state control process), wherein the gaming state includes an AT state that notifies an operation mode based on the result of the internal winning, and the first timing suggests ending the AT state. This is a certain timing in the display period of the end image (for example, during the execution of the first AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 33(c)), and the second timing suggests ending the AT state. It may be at a certain timing during the display period of the end image (for example, during execution of the second AT end effect AE shown in FIG. 33(g)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the annoyance caused to the player at the end of the AT state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's desire to play.

<Game system>
Next, the gaming system 10 according to this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the gaming system 10 according to this embodiment.

The gaming system 10 includes a management computer (external server) 30 that controls the entire system, and a plurality of mobile terminal devices 70 (for example, smart phones, mobile phones, , tablet terminal, etc.) and an in-store PC 40, and a plurality of game machines 50 (for example, a pachinko machine 50a, a slot machine 50b) connected to the in-store PC 40 so as to be able to communicate with each other via a network LNW. has been done.

The network LNW is typically a wired LAN (Local Area Network), but the form of communication may be wired or wireless as long as it is a line that allows mutual communication between devices. Further, the network WNW is typically a wireless LAN (Local Area Network), but the form of communication may be wired or wireless as long as it is a line that allows mutual communication between devices.

Note that the in-store PC 40 is installed outside the gaming parlor (for example, in a facility managed by a gaming machine manufacturer) and is connected to the gaming machines 50 (pachinko machine 50a, slot machine 50b) via the network WNW so that they can communicate with each other. It's okay.

The management computer 30 is a terminal for controlling the entire gaming system, and can be a conventionally known server machine or personal computer. The storage means (for example, HDD, DVD, etc.) of this management computer 30 stores operating information transmitted from the in-store PC 40, gaming information transmitted from the mobile terminal device 70, and the like.

Here, "operation information" refers to information regarding the operation of the gaming machine 50 (pachinko machine 50a, slot machine 50b), and includes, for example, gaming machine identification information (ID given to the gaming machine, model of the gaming machine , manufacturer name), machine identification information (ID given to machine between machines), game machine island identification information (ID given to game machine island), machine number, game start time, game end time, cumulative input This includes information such as the number of coins, the cumulative number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses, and the number of jackpots and small wins.

This operating information is output to the in-store PC 40 via the network LNW of island equipment installed in the game parlor, and is collected and managed by the management computer 30 via the network WNW.

"Game information" refers to information related to games, such as the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, the number of times each performance was executed, the number of ATs, and mission achievement information (related to a certain mission that has been completed). information), custom character release information (information on released characters), etc.

The player reads the two-dimensional code (details will be described later) displayed on the display device (for example, liquid crystal display device) of the gaming machine 50 with a device that can read the two-dimensional code (in this example, the mobile terminal device 70). By reading the URL information (access information) and accessing a specific mobile site (in this example, a website managed by the management computer 30 (external server)) based on the acquired URL information, this It is possible to transmit and record gaming information on the mobile site, and the mobile site stores gaming information, personal information (login password, etc.) in association with the two-dimensional code.

In addition, the player can log in to the gaming system 10 by entering the login password obtained from the mobile site into the gaming machine 50, and by being logged in, the player can play the games associated with the two-dimensional code. Information can be acquired from the mobile site and reflected on the gaming machine 50.

<Game system/two-dimensional code>
Next, the "two-dimensional code" according to the present invention will be explained.

The "two-dimensional code" according to the present invention refers to a code that can contain information in the horizontal and vertical directions, as opposed to a one-dimensional code (barcode) that only contains information in the horizontal direction, and is different from the conventional barcode. It can be roughly divided into two types: "stack-type two-dimensional codes" which have a stacked form, and "matrix-type two-dimensional codes" which have a grid-like form.

Representative examples of stack type two-dimensional codes include PDF417 and CODE49, and representative examples of matrix type two-dimensional codes include QR code (registered trademark), DataMatrix (registered trademark) code, and VeriCode (registered trademark). ), color code (registered trademark), SP code, three-dimensional code, etc.

The QR code also includes a design QR that allows you to draw an arbitrary illustration on the pattern of the code. There are some that express arbitrary illustrations with patterns.

The slot machine according to this example includes access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30), and game information regarding games (for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, It is equipped with a two-dimensional code generation means that generates a two-dimensional code (for example, a QR code) based on generated information including the number of times each performance has been executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc. , a two-dimensional code can be displayed based on an operation using an operating means (for example, the cross key 191a of the information display button 191 or the OK button 191b).

<Game system/login operation>
Next, the login operation of the gaming system 10 will be explained using FIGS. 35(a) to 35(f). Note that FIGS. 35(a) to 35(f) are diagrams showing the flow up to login of the gaming system 10 in chronological order.

A player can log into the gaming system 10 by inputting the login password obtained from the mobile site into the gaming machine 50. Here, an example of logging into the gaming system 10 by entering a login password into the slot machine 50b will be described.

35(a) to 35(b), when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in a certain gaming state (for example, non-gaming state), the menu is displayed by pressing the production button 192. This is a state in which a guidance display (in this example, display of a character string "Display menu when button is pressed") has been started to notify that display is possible.

The following figure (c) shows a state in which the presentation button 192 is pressed (button press) while the guidance display shown in figure (b) is being displayed, and the display of the menu is started.

The menu screen of this example includes a submenu display area arranged on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an explanation display area arranged on the right side of the display area.

In the submenu display area of the menu screen, there are multiple types of submenus (in this example, "Character Select", "Volume/Light Adjustment", "Login", "Quick Start", "Progress", and "Recording"). "Exit" and "Back" are displayed. The player tentatively selects a desired submenu (selection operation) using the cross key 191a of the information display button 191, and then presses the OK button 191b of the information display button 191 (decision operation) to display the submenu. It is possible to perform the corresponding functions.

In the explanation display area of the menu screen, an explanation display corresponding to the submenu temporarily selected by the cross key 191a is displayed. For example, as shown in Figure 35(c), when the submenu "Character Select" is selected, an explanation display saying "You can select your favorite character" is displayed, and as shown in Figure 35(d). As shown in , when the submenu ``Login'' is selected, an explanation message ``You can log in using the password obtained from the mobile site'' is displayed.

In addition, as shown in (h) of the same figure, when the selection operation of the sub-menu "Intermediate progress" is performed, an explanation display saying "You can view the progress of the game on the mobile site" is displayed, and As shown in 36(c), when the selection operation of the submenu "record and end" is performed, an explanatory display saying "a two-dimensional code for ending the game can be issued" is displayed.

Note that a submenu that is displayed in dark in the menu indicates that it cannot be selected by a selection operation. For example, since the state shown in FIG. 35(c) is before logging in to the gaming system 10, the submenu "Intermediate progress" and the submenu "Record and end" are displayed in black and cannot be selected by the selection operation. Can not.

In addition, since the state shown in FIG. 6(g) is when the gaming system 10 is being logged in, the submenu "Login" is displayed in black and cannot be selected by a selection operation. Note that even when the gaming system 10 is being logged in, it may be configured so that other players can log in, and in this case, the submenu "Login" is not displayed in black.

The state shown in FIG. 35(d) is the state in which the submenu "Login" has been selected, and the state shown in FIG. 35(e) is the state in which the submenu "Login" has been determined. be.

In the state shown in Figure 35(d), since the submenu "Login" has been selected, an explanation is displayed in the explanation display area saying "You can log in using the password obtained from the mobile site." is displayed.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(e), the login password input screen is displayed because the submenu "login" has been selected. On this login password input screen, the player uses the cross key 191a and the OK button 191b to input the login password obtained from the mobile site, and then uses the OK button 191b to press the "OK" button to log in. Perform the confirmation operation to confirm the password. Then, if the input login password is valid, it becomes possible to log in to the gaming system 10.

If the login password input by operating the cross key 191a or OK button 191b (operating the operating means) is valid, the management computer 30 of the gaming system 10 sets the gaming system 10 to the login state, and also allows the player to The player starts collecting and updating the game information of the game machine 50 corresponding to the login password input by the player, and stores the updated game information in association with the login password input by the player.

In addition, when the login state is entered, as shown in FIG. 35(f), a level display indicating the player's gaming level inherited from the previous login state (in this example, a character string "Lv. 25" is displayed, A meter display indicating the level's progress will be displayed. The player's gaming level is a numerical value that increases as the player completes a mission or reaches a specified number of games.

<Game system/progress viewing>
Next, intermediate progress viewing of the gaming system 10 will be explained using FIGS. 35(f) to 35(k). Note that FIGS. 35(f) to 35(k) are diagrams chronologically showing the flow from login to intermediate progress viewing in the gaming system 10.

By logging into the gaming system 10, the player can have the gaming machine 50 issue (generate) a two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) during the game for checking the progress of the game. be. Here, an example will be described in which a two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) is issued during a game in the slot machine 50b.

FIG. 35(g) shows that a menu display operation (for example, pressing the OK button 191b) is performed in a certain gaming state (for example, normal gaming state) shown in FIG. state.

Since this state is a login state of the gaming system 10, in this state, the submenu "Login" is displayed in black and cannot be selected by a selection operation, but other submenus can be selected.

In addition, in the same state, the default (initial setting) selection operation is the submenu "Character Select", so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character" is displayed. An explanation is displayed.

<Game system/viewing of progress/display of two-dimensional code during play>
The state shown in FIG. 35(h) is the state in which the selection operation for the submenu "Intermediate progress" has been performed, and the state shown in FIG. state.

In the state shown in FIG. 35(h), since the selection operation of the submenu "Intermediate progress" has been performed, an explanation display saying "You can view the progress of the game on the mobile site" is displayed in the explanation display area. ing.

In the state shown in the following figure (i), since the decision operation (second operation) of the submenu "Intermediate progress" has been performed, the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 and this An end button EB for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game, and an explanation display of the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game (in this example, " Please read the two-dimensional code on your device and view the progress of the game on the mobile site.'' is displayed.

The player reads the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 displayed on the display device of the slot machine 50b (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) with the mobile terminal device 70, etc., and obtains the URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (a website managed by the management computer 30) based on the acquired URL information, it is possible to acquire (download) the progress from this mobile site. .

Here, the "intermediate progress" that can be obtained by the two-dimensional code during the game (second two-dimensional code) includes at least part of the "gaming information" (in this example, the number of games played, the winning combination of each prize winning combination, etc.) (number of times). Note that the information included in the "progress" is not limited to this example, and may be the same as the game information.

The slot machine according to this example is capable of displaying a second two-dimensional code (for example, the in-game two-dimensional code CD2) based on a second operation by the operating means (for example, a decision operation using the OK button 191b), When displaying a second two-dimensional code (second case), maintain the login state and display the first confirmation display (for example, "Two-dimensional code") before displaying the second two-dimensional code. Is it OK to display this?" character string) is configured not to be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 35(i), the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 is displayed based on the decision operation with the OK button 191b, but the in-game two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) is displayed. Even if the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 is displayed (issued), the gaming system 10 will not be logged out from the logged-in state (the logged-in state will be maintained). Before displaying, a display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) for confirming whether or not to start displaying the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game. For example, a "two-dimensional code" shown in FIG. "Can I display the code?" is not displayed.

According to this example, when displaying a two-dimensional code (in this example, a two-dimensional code during a game), there is no need to operate the first confirmation display (in this example, the display start confirmation display), so it is less troublesome. This makes it possible to eliminate the problem of confusion and improve convenience for players.

<Game system/viewing progress/deletion of 2D code display during play>
The state shown in FIG. 35(j) is the state where the display end confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD2 during gaming has started, and the state shown in FIG. 35(k) is the state where the display end confirmation display shown in FIG. 35(j) has started. This is a state in which the Yes decision operation has been performed.

In the slot machine according to the present example, when an erasing operation is performed by the operating means (for example, an end decision operation using the end button EB) while the second two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code during a game) is displayed, , is configured to display a second confirmation display (for example, a display end confirmation display) regarding the second two-dimensional code.

In the state shown in FIG. 35(j), in the state where the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game shown in FIG. Since the erasing operation) has been performed, a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 is displayed to confirm whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 can be ended during the game.

In this display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2, a character string "Is it OK to end the display of the two-dimensional code?" and a two-dimensional code during the game (second two-dimensional code) CD2 are displayed. A Yes button is displayed to be selected to end the display of , and a No button is to be selected to continue displaying the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Note that the "second confirmation display" according to the present invention may be any display related to a two-dimensional code, and is not limited to this example. Therefore, for example, the display mode of the display completion confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during the game can be finished, and the two-dimensional code at the time of completion described later. (First two-dimensional code) The display mode of the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC1 for confirming whether or not the display of CD1 can be ended may be different.

Therefore, for example, in the display termination confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 that does not involve logging out, the character string "Is it OK to end the display of the two-dimensional code?" is displayed, while the display termination confirmation display that does not involve logging out The display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC1 may display a character string such as "Although you will be logged out, is it OK to end the display of the two-dimensional code?".

In the subsequent state shown in (k) of the same figure, this is because the Yes decision operation was performed using the Yes button while the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 shown in (j) of the same figure is being displayed. , After finishing (erasing) the display of the menu including the two-dimensional code (second two-dimensional code) CD2 during gaming, the gaming state before displaying the menu while maintaining the login state of the gaming system 10 (this example Now, the normal gaming state is restored.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35(j), a termination decision operation (erase operation by the operating means) is performed using the termination button EB, and a display termination confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 is displayed. , the Yes button will be displayed in a selected state. However, instead of the Yes button being selected, the No button may be displayed being selected.

By doing so, it is possible to further prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player. Specifically, if the Yes button is displayed in a selected state, if the OK button 191b is operated twice in a row (if the OK button 191b is operated incorrectly twice in a row) ), the two-dimensional code will be deleted, but if the No button is displayed with the selected button and the OK button 191b is pressed twice in a row (two consecutive times), the two-dimensional code will be deleted. 2D code will not be erased even if the user makes a mistake during operation).

<Game system/game recording end>
Next, the end of game recording in the gaming system 10 will be explained using FIGS. 36(a) to 36(h). Note that FIGS. 36(a) to 36(h) are diagrams showing the flow in chronological order from after login to the end of game recording in the gaming system 10.

By logging into the gaming system 10, the player can have the gaming machine 50 issue (generate) a two-dimensional code at the end of the game (first two-dimensional code) for recording gaming information and logging out. It is. Here, an example will be described in which a two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) is issued at the end of the game in the slot machine 50b.

FIG. 36(b) shows a state in which the presentation button 192 is pressed (button pressed) while the guidance display shown in FIG. 36(a) is being displayed, and the display of the menu is started.

In this state, since the gaming system 10 is being logged in, the submenu "Login" is displayed in black and cannot be selected by a selection operation, but other submenus can be selected.

In addition, in the same state, the default (initial setting) selection operation is the submenu "Character Select", so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character" is displayed. An explanation is displayed.

<Game system/Completion of game recording/Display of two-dimensional code at the end>
The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is a state where the selection operation of the submenu "Record and end" has been performed, and the state shown in FIG. 36(d) is the state where the selection operation of the submenu "Record and end" has been performed. has been carried out.

In the state shown in FIG. 35(c), since the submenu "Record and exit" has been selected, the explanation display area reads "A two-dimensional code can be issued to end the game." Displaying the display.

The slot machine according to the present example is capable of displaying a first two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the time of completion) based on a first operation by the operating means (for example, a decision operation using the OK button 191b); When displaying the first two-dimensional code (in the first case), the login state is set to the logout state, and the first confirmation display regarding the two-dimensional code is displayed before displaying the first two-dimensional code. (For example, display start confirmation display) is configured to be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 36(d), since the decision operation (first operation) for the submenu "Record and exit" has been performed, the two-dimensional code at the time of termination (first operation) shown in FIG. 36(e) has been performed. Before displaying the two-dimensional code (two-dimensional code) CD1, the display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1 is displayed to confirm whether or not to start displaying the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the end. .

This display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1 includes a character string "Is it OK to start displaying the two-dimensional code?" and a two-dimensional code at the end (first two-dimensional code) CD1. A Yes button is displayed, which is selected when starting the display of CD1, and a No button is selected when the display of the ending two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is to be stopped.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the display of the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code at the end of the game) due to an erroneous operation by the player, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, if the two-dimensional code (in this example, the two-dimensional code at the time of termination) is displayed due to an incorrect operation, you will be logged out and will have to log in again, which will be troublesome, but in this example According to , when displaying a two-dimensional code, by displaying the first confirmation display before displaying it, it is possible to prevent logout status due to erroneous operation, etc., and improve convenience for the player. .

Note that the "first confirmation display" according to the present invention may be any display related to a two-dimensional code, and is not limited to this example. Therefore, for example, a confirmation display confirming that the gaming system 10 changes from the login state to the logout state by displaying the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 at the time of termination (for example, "When the two-dimensional code is displayed, the login information may be displayed).

In the state shown in FIG. 36(e), since a Yes decision operation was performed using the Yes button while display start confirmation display (first confirmation display) RC1 shown in FIG. 36(d) is being displayed, A two-dimensional code at the time of termination (first two-dimensional code) CD1, an end button EB for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code at the time of termination (first two-dimensional code) CD1, and a two-dimensional code at the time of termination ( An explanation of CD1 (first two-dimensional code) is displayed (in this example, a character string reading "Please read the two-dimensional code with your terminal and save the game record on the mobile site") is displayed.

The player reads the ending two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 displayed on the display device (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 50b with the mobile terminal device 70, etc., and obtains the URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (a website managed by the management computer 30) based on the acquired URL information, gaming information (in this example, the number of games played, each prize winning combination) is displayed on this mobile site. It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of times a prize has been won, the number of times each performance has been executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 2(e), since the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is displayed at the time of termination, the gaming system 10 changes from the login state to the logout state.

<Game system/Completion of game recording/Deleting the display of the two-dimensional code at the end>
The state shown in FIG. 36(f) is the state where the display completion confirmation display for the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of completion has started, and the state shown in FIG. 36(g) is the state shown in the display completion confirmation display shown in FIG. 36(f). This is a state in which a Yes decision operation (or a game start operation) has been performed.

In the slot machine according to the present example, when an erasing operation is performed by the operating means (for example, a termination decision operation using the termination button EB) when the first two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code at the time of termination) is displayed, , is configured to display a first confirmation display (for example, a display end confirmation display).

In the state shown in FIG. 36(f), in the state where the end two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 shown in FIG. Since the deletion operation (erasing operation) has been performed, a display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 is displayed to confirm whether or not the display of the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 can be ended.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Additionally, if you accidentally erase the two-dimensional code before it can be read, you will be logged out and it will be impossible to read (re-display) the two-dimensional code. According to this example, by displaying the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 for confirming whether or not to end the display of the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1, the two-dimensional code It is possible to prevent the data from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, thereby increasing convenience for the player.

On the other hand, if a game start operation is performed using the start lever 135 while the end two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 shown in FIG. (Second confirmation display) The display of the menu including the two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is ended without displaying RC2, and the game state before displaying the menu (in this example, Return to normal gaming state).

According to this example, by performing the game start operation, it is possible to proceed with the game without displaying the second confirmation display (in this example, the display end confirmation display RC2). This can increase customer satisfaction.

In the subsequent state shown in (g) of the same figure, in the state where the display end confirmation display (second confirmation display) RC2 shown in Since the game start operation (game start operation) was performed, the display of the menu including the ending two-dimensional code (first two-dimensional code) CD1 is ended, and the game state before displaying the menu (in this example, the normal game condition) has returned to normal.

The state shown in FIG. 36(h) is when a menu display operation (for example, pressing the OK button 191b) is performed in a certain gaming state shown in FIG. 36(g) (normal gaming state in this example), and the menu is displayed. The display has started.

Since this state is a logout state of the gaming system 10, in the same state, the submenu "Intermediate progress" and the submenu "Record and end" are displayed in black, and neither can be selected by selection operation. However, other submenus, including "Login", are selectable.

In addition, in the same state, the default (initial setting) selection operation is the submenu "Character Select", so in the explanation display area of the menu screen, "You can select your favorite character" is displayed. An explanation is displayed.

<Game system/view progress, end game record/summary>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and an operation means (for example, the cross key 191a, the OK button 191b). etc.), access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30 shown in FIG. 34), and game information regarding games (for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, A two-dimensional code generation means for generating a two-dimensional code based on generated information including (number of times each performance has been executed, number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.), When the display means displays a two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code at the time of termination CD1 shown in FIG. 36(e)) based on a first operation by the operation means (for example, a decision operation using the OK button 191b). (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), a first confirmation display regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, display start confirmation display RC1 shown in FIG. 36(d)) is performed before displaying the two-dimensional code. This game machine is characterized by displaying the following.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the display of a two-dimensional code due to an erroneous operation by the player, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Further, the display means displays a two-dimensional code (for example, the in-game two-dimensional code CD2 shown in FIG. 35(i)) based on a second operation by the operation means (for example, a decision operation using the OK button 191b). (hereinafter referred to as the "second case"), the first confirmation display may not be displayed before displaying the two-dimensional code.

With such a configuration, when displaying a two-dimensional code, there is no need to operate the first confirmation display, so it is possible to eliminate troublesomeness and improve convenience for the player.

Further, the operation means is capable of inputting a password (for example, a login password), and includes a state management means for setting a login state when the password input by the operation by the operation means is valid, The management means may set the logged-in state to the logged-out state in the first case, while maintaining the logged-in state in the second case.

If a two-dimensional code is displayed due to an incorrect operation, the user will be logged out and will have to log in again, which will be troublesome. However, with this configuration, if a two-dimensional code is displayed, By displaying the first confirmation display before the display, it is possible to prevent a logout state due to an erroneous operation, etc., and improve convenience for the player.

Further, the operating means is capable of performing an erasing operation for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code (for example, an end determining operation using an end button EB shown in FIGS. 35(i) and 36(e)), and the display The means displays a second confirmation display regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, a display end confirmation display RC2 shown in FIG. 36(f)) when the erasing operation is performed by the operation means in the first case. In the second case, when the erasing operation is performed by the operation means, the second confirmation display (for example, the display end confirmation display RC2 shown in FIG. 35(j)) may be displayed. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

<Two-dimensional code issued before achievement display>
Next, the issuance of the two-dimensional code before displaying the achievement will be explained.

FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing an example of two-dimensional code issuance in chronological order before displaying the mission accomplishment and after displaying the mission accomplishment.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 37(a) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and has started playing M (M is a positive integer) games.

In this state, the player is not logged in to the gaming system 10 (non-login state), so in the Mth game, the player does not select a character, and the default (initial setting) is the character setting status. (character setting information) is set and the game progresses.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 37(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1 game.

This state is a state in which the player logs in to the gaming system 10 and sets the character setting status (character setting information) to Grandfather in character selection before the start of the M+1 game. ), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a level display indicating the player's gaming level (in this example, a display of a character string "Lv. 25" and a display of a meter indicating the progress state of the level) are displayed. ) is displayed, and in games after the M+1 game, the game progresses with the old man set as the character instead of Tono.

The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 37(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1000th game.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a certain mission is achieved in the logged-in state (for example, the number of games has reached 1000), a mission achievement display indicating that the certain mission has been achieved can be displayed. be.

In this example, in the M+1000th game in the logged-in state, the number of games has reached 1000 (a certain mission has been achieved), so in the next game, the M+1000th game in which the number of games has reached 1000, As shown in (a-2), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a mission achievement display MP (in this example, "1000 The text string "Game accomplished!" is displayed.

Note that "when a certain mission is achieved" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, when logging into the gaming system 10, the number of games played reaches a certain number with a specific character set. , when a rare performance (for example, a performance in which a premium character appears) is executed, when a specific continuous performance is executed, when a specific game (for example, an AT game) is entered (entered), when a specific If you win a game (for example, an AT game), if the amount of value (medals) acquired (number of medals) reaches a certain value, if the points reach a certain value, if the gaming level reaches a certain level. This may be the case, such as winning a mini-game, or winning a specific winning combination a certain number of times. Note that the mission accomplishment display is displayed at the start of the next game after the game in which the mission was accomplished.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 37(a) is a state in which the player logs out from the gaming system 10 after displaying the mission accomplishment display MP.

In this example, after the number of games has reached 1000 (achieved a certain mission) (after displaying the mission achievement display) and before starting the M+1002 game, the player selects the submenu "Record and exit". Since the two-dimensional code has been selected and issued (see Figure 36 for details), the mission achievement information (in this example, the number of games played has reached 1000) is displayed as shown in Figure 37 (a-3). At the time of termination, the two-dimensional code CD1 including the information shown) is displayed, and the player is logged out from the gaming system 10.

The player reads the end two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 50b with the mobile terminal device 70 or the like to obtain the URL information, and reads the obtained URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (a website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of times the game has been played, the number of ATs, mission accomplishment information, and custom character release information.

In the M+1002nd game after logging out, the default (initial setting) Tono is set in the character setting situation (character setting information) instead of the old man, and the game progresses.

The state indicated by the symbol T4' in FIG. 37(a) is a state in which the player logs out from the gaming system 10 before the mission accomplishment display MP is displayed.

In the slot machine according to this example, even before the mission accomplishment display (for example, mission accomplishment display MP shown in FIG. 37(a-2)) is displayed, mission accomplishment information (for example, the number of games has reached 1000) is displayed. It is possible to generate a two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of completion) containing information indicating that the mission has been reached (for example, the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of completion), and it is possible to display the two-dimensional code containing mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the operating means. .

In this example, before the start of the M+1000th game before the mission achievement display MP is displayed, the player selects the submenu "Record and end" to issue a two-dimensional code (see Figure 36 for details). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 37 (a-3'), a two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed at the time of completion that includes mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000), and You have logged out from the gaming system 10.

According to this example, a player who does not know the conditions for mission accomplishment may display the two-dimensional code and end the game even before the mission accomplishment display is displayed, so the player may By displaying a two-dimensional code including mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the player, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

Although illustration is omitted, the slot machine according to this example is configured so that if a two-dimensional code including mission accomplishment information is displayed before displaying the mission accomplishment display, the mission accomplishment display is not displayed. Therefore, in this example, before starting the M+1000 game, after displaying the ending two-dimensional code CD1 containing mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000), the M+1000 game is displayed. In the game, even if the number of games has reached 1000 (a certain mission has been achieved), the mission achievement display MP shown in FIG. 37(a-2) (in this example, "1000 games achieved!") The character string ) is not displayed.

With such a configuration, if a player displays a two-dimensional code containing mission accomplishment information and ends the game, the mission accomplishment information display will be a nuisance display for the next player, so the mission accomplishment display will be By not displaying this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Two-dimensional code issuance/modification example before achievement display>
Next, a modified example of issuing a two-dimensional code before displaying the achievement will be described using FIG. 37(b). FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, a modified example of issuing a two-dimensional code before displaying the mission accomplishment.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 37(b) is a state in which the player logs out from the gaming system 10 before displaying the mission accomplishment display MP2 shown in FIG. 37(b-2).

In the slot machine according to this example, even before the mission accomplishment display (for example, the mission accomplishment display MP2 shown in FIG. 37(b-2)) is displayed, the mission accomplishment information (for example, the success of the continuous performance) is displayed. It is possible to generate a two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code CD3 at the time of termination shown in FIG. 37(b-1)) including information indicating the following information), and a certain operation by the operating means (for example, a decision operation using the OK button 191b) can be generated. It is possible to display a two-dimensional code containing mission achievement information based on the following.

The state shown in FIG. 37(b) is before the start of the M+999th game and before the successive success (accomplishment of a certain mission) in the M+1000th game, but the continuous performance is controlled by the control unit. Therefore, it is internally determined that the continuous performance will be successful in the M+1000th game.

Therefore, this state is the state before the mission achievement display MP2 is displayed after successive consecutive runs have been successful (achieved a certain mission), but if the player selects the submenu "Record and end". As shown in Figure 37 (b-1), mission achievement information (in this example, information indicating that a specific continuous performance was executed) ) and displays the two-dimensional code CD3 at the time of termination, and logs out from the gaming system 10.

According to this example, a player who does not know the conditions for mission accomplishment may display the two-dimensional code and end the game even before the mission accomplishment display is displayed, so the player may By displaying a two-dimensional code including mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the player, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, even if the mission has not actually been completed, when the mission is confirmed internally, a two-dimensional code containing mission completion information will be displayed to increase player satisfaction. be able to.

In FIG. 37(b), the state indicated by symbol T2 is a state in which the player has started the M+1000th game while logging in to the gaming system 10, and the state indicated by symbol T3 is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10. This is the state in which the M+1001st game has been completed while logged in.

In the slot machine according to this example, when a certain mission is achieved in the logged-in state (for example, a continuous performance is successful), the certain mission is achieved in the next game after the game in which the certain mission was achieved. It is possible to display a mission accomplishment display indicating that the mission has been completed.

In this example, in the M+1000th game in the logged-in state, the continuous performance was successful (a certain mission was achieved), so as shown in FIG. 37 (b-2), the next game in which the certain mission was achieved In the game (in this example, at the start of the M+1001st game in the logged-in state), a mission accomplishment display MP2 ( In this example, the character string "Continuous production success achieved!" is displayed.

In addition, in the M+1000th game, since the number of games has reached 1000 (another certain mission has been achieved), the mission achievement display MP2 (in this example, the text "Continuous performance success achieved!" In addition to the mission achievement display MP1 (in this example, "1000 games achieved!") indicating that the number of games has reached 1000 (another certain mission has been achieved). (display of character string) is displayed.

Furthermore, in the M+1000th game, the small panda character was released based on the execution of a specific continuous performance (achieving a certain mission) (achieving another certain mission based on a certain mission). In addition to the mission achievement display MP2 (in this example, display of the string "Continuous performance success achieved!"), a small panda character is released (a character string that has been released based on a certain mission) ) is displayed as a mission accomplishment display MP3 (in this example, a character string "Little panda character released!") is displayed.

Note that the "mission accomplishment display" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, if the small panda character has already been released when the continuous performance is successful, the "mission achievement display" shown in FIG. 37 (b-3) As shown in , in the display area of the mission accomplishment display MP3 (in this example, the character string "Little Panda Character Released!" is displayed), the mission accomplishment display MP1 (in this example, the character string "1000 games achieved!") is displayed. ) may be displayed.

Furthermore, when displaying multiple mission accomplishment displays, they may be displayed sequentially in one display area instead of being displayed individually in multiple display areas of the liquid crystal display device 157. Similarly, if the little panda character has already been released, the mission accomplishment display MP3 (in this example, the character string "Little panda character released!") is not displayed, but the mission accomplishment display MP1 (the main character string is displayed) is not displayed. In this example, the character string "1000 games achieved!") and the mission accomplishment display MP2 (in this example, the character string "Continuous production success achieved!") are displayed alternately in one display area. It's okay.

<Two-dimensional code issuance/summary before achievement display>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) and an operation means (for example, the cross key 191a, the OK button 191b). etc.), access information (for example, URL information) for accessing an external server (for example, the management computer 30 shown in FIG. 34), and game information regarding games (for example, the number of games played, the number of times each winning combination was won, A two-dimensional code generating means that generates a two-dimensional code based on generated information including the number of times each performance has been executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc. , the game information includes mission achievement information regarding a certain mission (for example, information indicating that the number of games has reached 1000), and the display means displays information when the certain mission has been achieved (for example, information indicating that the number of games has been played) reaches 1000 times), a mission accomplishment display (for example, the mission accomplishment display MP shown in FIG. 37(a-2)) can be displayed indicating that the certain mission has been accomplished, and the two-dimensional The code generation means generates the two-dimensional code (for example, the two-dimensional code at the time of completion CD1 shown in FIG. 37(a-3')) including the mission accomplishment information even before the mission accomplishment display is displayed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the display means is capable of displaying the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the operation means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, a player who does not know the conditions for mission accomplishment may display the two-dimensional code and end the game even before the mission accomplishment display is displayed. Therefore, by displaying a two-dimensional code including mission achievement information based on a certain operation by the operating means, it is possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage.

Further, in the case where the two-dimensional code including the mission achievement information is displayed before displaying the mission achievement display, the display means may display the mission achievement display even when the mission achievement display timing has come. It may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, if a player displays a two-dimensional code containing mission accomplishment information and ends the game, the mission accomplishment information display will be a nuisance display for the next player, so the mission accomplishment display will be By not displaying this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, the display means may display the two-dimensional display including the mission achievement information regarding the certain mission even before the certain mission is achieved, when it is determined that the certain mission will be achieved. It may also be possible to display the code.

With such a configuration, even if the mission has not actually been completed, if the mission is internally determined to have been completed, a two-dimensional code containing the mission completion information will be displayed, allowing the game to be completed. This can increase customer satisfaction.

<Automatic setting of birthday character>
Next, automatic setting of birthday characters will be explained.

In the slot machine according to this example, a corresponding character game becomes selectable on a specific day (in this example, a birthday) based on RTC (real-time clock) information.

The first sub-control unit 400 includes an RTC having a clock/calendar function that measures "year", "month", "day", "day of the week", "hour", "minute", and "second". The RTC of this example includes an oscillation circuit section that generates a clock signal based on the oscillation operation of a predetermined (for example, 32.768 kHz) crystal resonator, a register circuit section in which the generated time information is written, and a battery It is configured with a backup battery capable of backup.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/When there is no character corresponding to birthday>
FIG. 38(a) is a diagram chronologically showing an example of a performance when there is no character whose birthday falls within a certain game period.

The slot machine according to the present example includes a setting means (for example, a custom function) that can set character setting information regarding a character (for example, information regarding a character's name and costume).

After logging into the gaming system 10, the player uses the cross key 191a to tentatively select (select) the submenu "Character Select" of the menu explained using FIG. By performing a pressing operation (determination operation), it is possible to execute a function (custom function) corresponding to the submenu "Character Select".

Note that instead of selecting a character after logging in, character information may be associated with the login password obtained from the mobile site.

In the custom function (setting means) of this example, when the character setting information is initialized (for example, when logged out from the gaming system 10), the character setting information regarding the first character (for example, the lord's character) ( For example, it is configured to set the den (costume A)).

Note that the "first character" according to the present invention is not limited to the character of the lord, but may be another character such as the old man. Further, the "character setting information regarding the character" is not limited to the name of the character or the costume of the character, but may also be the aspect of the character (for example, size, color, shape, etc.).

In the custom function (setting means) of this example, when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when the character is released), character setting information (for example, While it is possible to set the princess (costume A)), it is not possible to set character setting information regarding the second character if a certain condition is not met (for example, if the character has not been released).

Note that the "second character" according to the present invention is not limited to the princess character, but may be other characters such as an old man or a small panda. Further, the "certain condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the release of a character, but may be, for example, a condition that a lottery is held to decide whether or not to give a second character and that the lottery is won. However, the condition may be that the player has won a specific winning combination (for example, a rare winning combination), that the player has entered a specific gaming state (for example, AT gaming), or that the player has achieved a certain mission. This may be a condition.

Further, the slot machine according to the present example includes a presentation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing a presentation, and the presentation means is configured to perform a presentation (for example, a custom function) according to the character setting information set by the setting means. It is possible to execute a custom character stage (in which characters set by) appear.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started playing M (M is a positive integer) games.

In the same situation, the player changed the character from the lord wearing costume A (first character) to the princess wearing costume A (second character) using the custom function, so the character setting status (Character setting information) is changed from the lord (costume A) to the princess (costume A).

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not been won yet, in the Mth game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

Note that in this example, the custom character stage is configured to be executed only if the custom character stage transition lottery is won, but the conditions for executing the custom character stage (performance according to character setting information) are as follows. Not limited to this example, for example, if a character is set by the custom function, the custom character stage may be always executed in subsequent games without holding a lottery, or only in a specific game state (for example, normal (only during a game, only during an AT game), a custom character stage may be executed.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1 game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to princess (costume A) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+1 game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to princess (costume A), so in the M+1 game, FIG. A production (custom character stage) in which the princess (costume A) appears is performed as shown in 1).

According to this example, it is possible to provide a performance according to the player's character setting information, and by attracting the player's interest, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the second character (in this example, the princess character), to make the second character feel special, and to increase the player's desire to play.

The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which the player logs out from the gaming system 10 before the start of the M+10th game.

In the same situation, before the start of the M+10th game, the player selected the submenu "Record and finish" to issue a two-dimensional code (see Figure 36 for details), so the ), the two-dimensional code CD1 including game information is displayed at the time of termination, and the player is logged out from the gaming system 10.

Further, the slot machine according to the present example includes an initialization means capable of initializing character setting information.

In this example, when the player logs out from the gaming system 10, the character setting information is initialized by the initialization means, so the character setting information is changed from the princess (costume A) to the default (initial setting) lord ( Changed to costume A).

Note that the conditions for initializing the character setting information are not limited to this example, and include, for example, when the power is cut off and restored to the slot machine (for example, when a game parlor opens), or when the setting value is changed. The slot machine may be reset, or the power may be turned on after being turned off for a long time.

Furthermore, "initializing the character setting information" according to the present invention is not limited to setting the character setting information to the first character setting information (in this example, the den (costume A)). , an old man, etc. may also be set in the setting information of other characters.

The slot machine according to this example includes a storage means (e.g., RAM) that stores at least date and time information (e.g., information on date and time of birth) of one or more characters' birthdays, and is capable of generating at least date and time information. The setting means includes a time information generating means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)), and the setting means is configured to set a certain period of time (for example, a day on which a player is playing a game) based on the date and time information of the time information generating means. If the date and time information of the character's birthday (for example, a princess character) is included, and the character setting information has been initialized (for example, if the player logs out from the gaming system 10 and the character setting information is initialized) character setting information regarding the certain character is set.

The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which the character setting information is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10, but in this example, the character setting information is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10. period (for example, December 25th) does not include the date and time information of a certain character's birthday (because there is no character whose birthday is December 25th), the character setting information is set to the default (initial setting). )'s palace (costume A).

In addition, in the same state, the custom character stage transfer lottery has not yet been won, so in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 38(a) is a state in which the player has not logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+11th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume A) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+11th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume A). 3) A production (custom character stage) in which the lord (costume A) appears is executed.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/When the princess character has a birthday>
FIG. 38(b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of an effect when a princess character's birthday is included in a certain game period.

The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 38(b) is a state in which the player has logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started playing M (M is a positive integer) games.

This situation occurs when the player uses the custom function to change the character from the default (initial setting) Tono (first character) (costume A) to Grandpa (second character) (costume A). For this reason, the character setting status (character setting information) is changed from Tono (costume A) to Grandpa (costume A).

In addition, in the same state, since the custom character stage transition lottery has not been won yet, in the Mth game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

The state indicated by the symbol T2 in FIG. 38(b) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started the M+1 game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Grandpa (costume A) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+1 game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Grandpa (costume A), so in the M+1 game, the state shown in FIG. 39 (b-1) A production (custom character stage) in which the old man (costume A) appears is executed as shown in FIG.

According to this example, it is possible to provide a performance according to the player's character setting information, and by attracting the player's interest, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 38(b) is a state in which the player logs out from the gaming system 10 before the start of the M+10th game.

In the same situation, before the start of the M+10th game, the player selected the submenu "Record and finish" to issue a two-dimensional code (see Figure 36 for details), so the ), the two-dimensional code CD1 including game information is displayed at the time of termination, and the player is logged out from the gaming system 10.

In this state, the character setting information is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10, and in this example, on the day when the player is playing the game (a certain period, for example, December 25th), the character setting information is Since the date and time information of the character (a certain character)'s birthday (in this example, December 25th) is included, the character setting information is set to the princess (costume S). Note that the costume S (special costume) is information that can be set in the character setting information only when it is the princess's birthday.

In addition, in the same state, the custom character stage transfer lottery has not yet been won, so in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 38(b) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started the M+11th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to princess (costume S) and the custom character stage shift lottery is won, so in the M+11th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to princess (costume S), so in the M+11th game, 3) A production (custom character stage) in which the princess (costume S) appears is executed.

According to this example, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the second character (in this example, the princess character), to make the second character feel special, and to create an unexpected production. This can increase the player's desire to play.

Note that the characters that appear on the custom character stage are not limited to this example, and for example, a setting suggestion character that suggests setting values may appear. In this case, for example, if you win a lottery to decide whether or not to suggest settings and make a setting suggestion character appear, it is preferable to make the setting suggestion character appear even if you have set a custom character using the custom function. Furthermore, even if a custom character has not been set using the custom function and a character corresponding to the birthday is to appear, it is preferable that the setting suggestion character be given priority to appear.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/When the lord's character has a birthday>
FIG. 39(a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, an example of an effect when the birthday of the lord's character is included in a certain game period.

Note that since the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 39(a) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 38(a), hereinafter, the states indicated by symbols T3 in FIG. explain.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 39(a), the character setting status (character setting information) is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10, and in this example, the day (or Period (for example, June 6th) includes the date and time information of the lord's character (a certain character)'s birthday (in this example, June 6th), so the character setting status (character setting information) is set to the palace (costume S). Note that the costume S (special costume) is information that can be set in the character setting information only when it is the birthday of the lord.

In addition, in the same state, the custom character stage transfer lottery has not yet been won, so in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 39(a) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started the M+11th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume S) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+11th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume S), so in the M+11th game, the state shown in FIG. 39 (a- A production (custom character stage) in which the lord (costume S) appears is executed as shown in 3).

According to this example, since a performance (custom character stage) in which the lord (costume S) appears is executed, a surprising performance can be provided and the gameplay can be enhanced.

<Automatic setting of birthday character/When an unreleased character has a birthday>
FIG. 39(b) is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of an effect when a certain game period includes the birthday of an unreleased character.

Note that the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 39(b) are the same as the states indicated by symbols T1 and T2 in FIG. 38(b), so hereinafter, the states indicated by symbols T3 in FIG. explain.

In the state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 39(b), the character setting status (character setting information) is initialized by logging out from the gaming system 10, and in this example, the date on which the player is playing the game (or (For example, March 3rd) includes the date and time information of the little panda character (a certain character)'s birthday (in this example, March 3rd), but the little panda character is not yet released. Since the character is a character that has not been released (an unreleased character), the character setting status (character setting information) is set to the default (initial setting) den (costume A). Note that if the little panda character has not been released, the little panda character cannot be selected even during login.

In addition, in the same state, the custom character stage transfer lottery has not yet been won, so in the M+10th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 without executing the custom character stage. Regardless of the situation, the castle stage production will be carried out.

The state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 39(b) is a state in which the player has not logged in to the gaming system 10 and has started the M+11th game.

In this state, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume A) and the custom character stage transition lottery is won, so in the M+11th game, the character setting status (character setting information) is set to Tono (costume A), so in the M + 11th game, 3) A production (custom character stage) in which the lord (costume A) appears is executed.

According to this example, a production (custom character stage) in which an unreleased character appears is not executed, so the rarity of the unreleased character can be ensured and the unreleased character can be made to feel special. , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

Note that although birthdays have been described here as an example of a period during which a character in a special costume or a special character can be selected, the "special date and time information" according to the present invention is not limited to birthdays. For example, it can be a few days before and after the birthday, Monday can be the first character, Tuesday the second character, January can be the first character, February can be the second character, etc. You can do it like this.

<Custom functions for production elements>
Next, the customization function of the performance element will be explained using FIGS. 40(a) to 40(d).

FIGS. 40(a) to 40(d) are diagrams showing an example of the flow from displaying the menu to displaying the character selection screen.

<Custom functions/menu screen for production elements>
The state shown in FIG. 40(a) is triggered by the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (for example, the elapse of a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) in a certain gaming state (e.g., non-gaming state)). This is a state in which a guidance display (in this example, a display of a character string "Display menu by pressing button") informing that the menu screen MN can be displayed by pressing the button 192 has been started.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 40(b), the presentation button 192 is pressed (button press) while the guidance display shown in FIG. 40(a) is being displayed, and the display of the menu screen MN is started. state.

The menu screen MN of this example is composed of a submenu display area MN1 placed on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an explanation display area MN2 placed on the right side of the display area.

The submenu display area MN1 has multiple types of submenus (in this example, "Character Select", "Volume/Light Adjustment", "Login", "Quick Start", "Progress", "Record and End") , "Back") is displayed. The player tentatively selects a desired submenu (selection operation) using the cross key 191a of the information display button 191, and then presses the OK button 191b of the information display button 191 (decision operation) to display the submenu. It is possible to perform the corresponding functions.

In the explanation display area MN2, an explanation display corresponding to the submenu temporarily selected in the submenu display area MN1 is displayed. For example, as shown in Figure 40(b), when the submenu "Character Select" is tentatively selected, the explanation corresponding to "Character Select" (in this example, "You can select your favorite character") is displayed. ) is displayed.

<Custom functions for production elements/character selection screen>
The state shown in FIG. 40(c) is a state in which the submenu "Character Select" is selected on the menu screen MN shown in FIG. 40(b), and the character selection screen CS is displayed.

The player tentatively selects (selects) the submenu "Character Select" on the menu screen MN shown in FIG. It is possible to display the character selection screen CS shown in FIG. 40(c).

The character selection screen CS of this example includes a selection display area CS1 arranged on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and an explanation display area CS2 arranged on the right side of the display area.

The selection display area CS1 includes a selection display SD that includes a selection image for allowing the player to select one character (performance element) from among a plurality of types of characters (performance element), and a selection display SD that imitates the appearance of the cross key 191a. A cross key icon and an OK button icon that resembles the appearance of the OK button 191b are displayed.

The selection display SD of this example includes a lord icon TI (selection image) for selecting a lord character, an old man icon JI (selection image) for selecting an old man character, and an old man icon JI (selection image) for selecting a princess character. Princess icon HI (selection image) and ? for selecting unreleased characters? Consists of icon QI (selected image).

With this selection display SD being displayed, by operating the left/right/up/down buttons of the cross key 191a (selection operation), you can select the Tono icon TI, the old man icon JI, the princess icon HI, ? It is possible to temporarily select one of the icons QI, and by operating the OK button 191b (decision operation), character setting information (for example, regarding the character's name and costume) regarding the character corresponding to the temporarily selected icon is displayed. information) can be set.

In the explanation display area CS2, in the selection display SD, there are a lord icon TI, an old man icon JI, a princess icon HI, ? When any of the icons QI is tentatively selected, an explanation regarding the character corresponding to the tentatively selected icon is displayed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 40(c), since the den's icon TI is provisionally selected in the selection display SD, the explanation display area CS2 includes an explanation (in this example) regarding the den's character corresponding to the den's icon TI. , ``My lord is...'' and information about the character's birthday (``My birthday is July 11th'') are displayed. Note that birthday information may not be displayed in the explanation display area CS2.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 40(d), in the selection display SD? Since the icon QI is provisionally selected, the explanation display area CS2 displays ?? Explanation regarding the unreleased character corresponding to the icon QI (in this example, information on the conditions for releasing the unreleased character, such as "It will be released when a certain condition is achieved!") is displayed.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which character setting information regarding a character (for example, information regarding the character's name and costume) is set as a custom function of the production element, but the "production element" according to the present invention It is not limited to this, and may be, for example, the audio form (e.g., BGM, sound effects, dialogue, music, volume, etc.) of the sound output from the sound output means (e.g., speaker); in this case, multiple It may be configured such that one or more audio aspects can be set from among the various types of audio aspects.

Also, for example, it may be the emission mode (e.g., emission color, emission mode, light amount, etc.) of the light output from the light output means (for example, a lamp or LED); in this case, among multiple types of emission modes, It may be configured such that one or more light emitting modes can be set. Also, for example, it may be a display mode (for example, a background image, a production mode, a design of a pattern, etc.) of a display by a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and in this case, one of a plurality of display modes may be displayed. It may be configured such that one or more display modes can be set.

Also, for example, it may be a movable mode (e.g., vibration, rotation, operation, stop, etc.) of a movable body (for example, a performance movable body), and in this case, one or more of a plurality of types of movable modes may be used. The movable mode may be configured to be settable, and the "effect element" according to the present invention includes these characters, the sound mode of the sound output means, the light emitting mode of the light output means, the display mode of the display means, and the movable mode. It may be one, more than one, or a combination of all of the body movement modes.

<Custom functions for production elements/birthday icon>
Next, the birthday icon of the custom function of the performance element will be explained.

FIGS. 40(e) to 40(g) are diagrams showing examples of birthday icons, and FIG. 40(g') is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 40(g).

<Custom function of production elements/Birthday icon (lord)>
The state shown in FIG. 40(e) is a diagram showing an example of the character selection screen CS1 when the RTC date and time information and the birthday of the lord's character (special date and time information) match.

In the same state, the day when the player is playing the game (date and time information, in this example, July 11th) is the birthday of the lord's character (direction element) (special date and time information, in this example, July 11th). day) (because the RTC date and time information and the special date and time information (birthday) of the performance element (lord's character) stored in RAM matched), on the character selection screen CS1. , the palace icon TI (selected image) has a birthday icon BI (in this example, it includes the character string "birthday") that can be recognized as the birthday (special date and time information) of the palace character (direction element). images) are added and displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to display the icon TI (selection image) of the palace for selecting the character (direction element) in a manner that allows recognition of the birthday (special date and time information) corresponding to the character (direction element). Therefore, it becomes easier to inform players that it is a special date and time, and it becomes possible to increase the operating rate.

Further, in this example, in the explanation display area CS2, information on the character's birthday such as "My birthday is July 11th" is displayed as an explanation regarding the den character corresponding to the den icon TI. Therefore, it is possible to reliably inform the player that it is a special date and time for the lord's character, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

<Custom functions for production elements/Birthday icon (princess)>
The state shown in FIG. 40(f) is a diagram showing an example of the character selection screen CS2 when the RTC date and time information and the princess character's birthday (special date and time information) match.

In this state, the day the player is playing the game (date and time information, in this example, December 25th) is the birthday of the princess character (direction element) (special date and time information, in this example, December 25th). day) (because the RTC date and time information and the special date and time information (birthday) of the performance element (princess character) stored in RAM matched), on the character selection screen CS2. , the princess icon HI (selected image) includes a birthday icon BI (in this example, it includes the character string "birthday") that can be recognized as the birthday (special date and time information) of the princess character (direction element). images) are added and displayed.

According to this example, it is possible to display the princess icon HI (selection image) for selecting a character (direction element) in a manner that allows recognition of the birthday (special date and time information) corresponding to the character (direction element). Therefore, it becomes easier to inform players that it is a special date and time, and it becomes possible to increase the operating rate.

In addition, in this example, when the character setting information (direction element setting information) is initialized and the character setting information (direction element setting information) corresponding to a specific character is not set, the default (initial setting) character (In this example, the character of the lord) is not the character setting information of the character (in this example, the princess character) that corresponds to the birthday (special date and time information) (for example, information about the princess's costume). It is set as a priority.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the birthday icon BI of the princess icon HI, information on the birthday of the temporarily selected palace icon TI (July 11) is displayed in the explanation display area CS2. In addition to the fact that today is the special date and time for the princess character, it is possible to notify the player in advance of the special date and time for other characters, thereby increasing the player's desire to visit the store.

<Custom functions for production elements/Birthday icon (unreleased little panda)>
The state shown in FIG. 40(g) is a diagram showing an example of the character selection screen CS3 when the RTC date and time information matches the birthday (special date and time information) of the unreleased little panda character.

In this state, the day the player is playing the game (date and time information, in this example, March 3rd) is the birthday (special date and time information, in this example) of the unreleased little panda character (performance element). , March 3rd) (because the RTC date and time information and the special date and time information (birthday) of the production element (little panda character) stored in RAM matched), On the character selection screen CS3? The icon QI (selected image) is a birthday icon BI (in this example, an image containing the character string "birthday") that can be recognized as the birthday (special date and time information) of the unreleased character (direction element). ) is added and displayed.

According to this example, the character (performance element) is selected in such a manner that the birthday (special date and time information) corresponding to the character (performance element) can be recognized. Since the icon TI (selected image) can be displayed, it becomes easier to inform players that it is a special date and time, and it becomes possible to increase the operating rate.

In addition, in this example, when the character setting information (direction element setting information) is initialized and the character setting information (direction element setting information) corresponding to a specific character is not set, the unreleased small panda is released. When the conditions are met and the little panda is released, the character corresponding to the birthday (special date and time information) is used instead of the character setting information of the default (initial setting) character (in this example, the character of the lord). (In this example, the character of the little panda) character setting information (for example, information regarding the costume of the little panda) is set preferentially.

In addition, in this example, ? In addition to the birthday icon BI of the icon QI, in the explanation display area CS2, information on the birthday (July 11th) of the tentatively selected palace icon TI is displayed, so today is the birthday of the unreleased character. In addition to the special dates and times for other characters, the players can be notified in advance of the special dates and times for other characters, increasing the players' desire to visit the store.

Note that when the special date and time information is the birthday of an unreleased character, as shown in FIG. 40(g'), ? By displaying only the icon QI (selected image), it may be configured such that it is impossible to recognize that it is the birthday (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (performance element).

According to this example, it is possible to conceal the birthday of an unreleased character, and it is possible to increase the rarity of the unreleased character.

In addition, even if the configuration is such that it is not possible to recognize the birthday (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (direction element), if the conditions for the unreleased character to be released are met, the character will be released. What if? A birthday icon that can be recognized as the birthday (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (direction element) may be added to and displayed on the icon QI (selected image), or it may not be displayed. good.

<Custom functions for production elements/Birthday icon/Special date and time information>
The "special date and time information" according to the present invention is not limited to birthdays, but is configured such that a new character is released after a certain period of time (for example, one month) after the installation of the game machine. In this case, the "special date and time information" is set to one month later (for example, May 1st) after the installation date of the gaming machine (for example, April 1st).

And, what day (date and time information, for example, May 1st) is the player playing the game? If the period is included in the release date (special date and time information; in this example, May 1st) of the character (production element) (RTC date and time information and special date and time information of the production element stored in RAM) ), if it matches)? An icon (for example, an image containing the character string "NEW" or "new") that can be recognized as the release date (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (direction element) is added to the icon (selected image). Add and display.

On the other hand, what day (date and time information; for example, May 2nd) is the player playing? If the period is not included in the release date (special date and time information; in this example, May 1st) of the character (production element) (RTC date and time information and special date and time information of the production element stored in RAM) ), if it doesn't match? By displaying only the icon (selected image), it is made impossible to recognize that it is the release date (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (performance element).

Furthermore, on what day (date and time information, for example, May 2nd) is the player playing the game? Even if it is a period that is not included in the release date (special date and time information, May 1st in this example) of the character (performance element), for example, ? When the icon QI (selected image) is temporarily selected, ? in the explanation display area CS2. Information on the birthday of the icon QI may be displayed.

Further, the "special date and time information" according to the present invention is not limited to "a certain day (one day)", but may be "a certain period (multiple days)", for example, from the installation of a game machine to When configuring a new character to be released during a period of time (for example, a period from one month to two weeks after installation), set the "special date and time information" to the installation date of the game machine (for example, April Set the period from one month to two weeks after (for example, May 1st to May 14th).

And, what day (date and time information, for example, May 9th) is the player playing? If the period is included in the release period (special date and time information. In this example, from May 1st to May 14th) of the character (production element) (RTC date and time information and production element stored in RAM) ), if the special date and time information of ? An icon (for example, an image containing the character string "NEW" or "new") that can be recognized as the release date (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (direction element) is added to the icon (selected image). Add and display.

On the other hand, what day (date and time information; for example, May 15th) is the player playing? If the period is not included in the release period (special date and time information. In this example, from May 1st to May 14th) of the character (production element) (RTC date and time information and production element stored in RAM) ), if the special date and time information does not match? By displaying only the icon (selected image), it is made impossible to recognize that it is the release date (special date and time information) of an unreleased character (performance element).

In addition, "special date and time information" according to the present invention includes the installation date of a new game machine (new machine), the new opening date or renewal opening date of the game shop, the date and period of the event at the game shop, the business hours of the game shop. , a certain time period (morning, afternoon) during business hours of a game parlor, holidays, year-end and New Year holidays, Golden Week, etc.

Furthermore, the timing for determining whether or not the date and time information matches the special date and time information is not limited to the timing at which the character selection image is displayed; for example, at the timing at which the character selection image is displayed, the date and time information and the special date and time information match. However, if the date and time information matches the special date and time information during the game, character setting information for the character corresponding to the special date and time information may be set.

In addition, if the power of the gaming machine is turned on from off with the date and time information and special date and time information matching, the character setting information of the character corresponding to the special date and time information is set using the power on as an opportunity. It's okay.

Furthermore, when the date and time information and the special date and time information match while the power of the gaming machine is still on, the character setting information of the character corresponding to the special date and time information may be set. In this case, The timing to set the character setting information may be the timing when an operation to display the menu screen is performed for the first time after it is determined that the date and time information and the special date and time information match, or the timing at which the first game is started. (when the first start lever operation is performed), or one or both of these timings.

In addition, even if character setting information different from the character setting information of the character corresponding to the special date and time information is set, if the date and time information and the special date and time information match, the character corresponding to the special date and time information The character setting information may be set with priority.

<Custom functions for production elements/Birthday icon/Selected image>
The "selected image" according to the present invention may be any image that can be displayed in a manner that allows it to be recognized that it is special date and time information corresponding to a production element, and is limited to a manner in which a birthday icon is added. isn't it.

Therefore, for example, the explanation display in the explanation display area CS2 explained using FIG. A dedicated page may be set up to display this explanatory display, or when a specific character icon is selected, information regarding the birthday of the character corresponding to the icon may be displayed on a separate page. It may be displayed in the display area, or information regarding the birthday of the character corresponding to the icon may be output as a voice (for example, a voice such as "Today is your birthday").

Alternatively, it may be a sound (e.g., "Today is your birthday") from a sound output means (e.g., a speaker), or a light output means (e.g., an LED) to indicate that it is a birthday. may be provided, and when an icon of a specific character is selected, the light output means may be turned on or blinked to notify that the character corresponding to the icon has a birthday.

<Automatic setting/summary of birthday character>
As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a setting means (for example, , custom function), an initialization means capable of initializing setting information of the character, and a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing production, the game machine comprising: The production means is capable of executing a production according to the character setting information set by the setting means (for example, a custom character stage in which a character set by a custom function appears), and the character is The game machine includes a character (for example, a lord character), and the setting means sets character setting information regarding the first character in a state where the character setting information is initialized.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a performance according to the player's character setting information, and by attracting the player's interest, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine.

Further, the character includes a second character (for example, a princess character), and the setting means is configured to set the second character when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when the character is released). Character setting information regarding the character can be set, and the setting means disables setting of the character setting information regarding the second character when the certain condition is not satisfied (for example, when the character is not released). It may be possible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the second character, make the second character feel special, and increase the player's desire to play.

Further, a storage means (e.g., RAM) for storing at least special date and time information (e.g., date and time of birth, a first character for Monday, a second character for Tuesday) corresponding to one or more of the characters; , a time information generating means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) capable of generating at least date and time information, and the setting means is configured such that the date and time information of the time information generating means is set to the special time information corresponding to a certain character. If the period is included in the date and time information, and the character setting information is initialized, the character setting information regarding the certain character may be set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising performance and enhance the gameplay.

In other words, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a setting means (for example, a custom function), an initialization means capable of initializing the setting information of the character, a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157) capable of executing production, and a special date and time corresponding to one or more of the characters. A storage means (e.g., RAM) for storing at least information (e.g., date and time of birth, a first character for Monday, a second character for Tuesday), and a time information generating means (for example, a RAM) capable of generating at least date and time information. For example, the game machine is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC)), and the production means is configured to produce a production according to the character setting information set by the setting means (for example, a character set by a custom function). a custom character stage), the characters include a first character (for example, a lord character) and a second character (for example, a princess character), and the setting means includes: In a case where the date and time information of the time information generating means is not a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the character, and in a state where the character setting information is initialized, the date and time information regarding the first character is The setting means sets the character setting information, and when the date and time information of the time information generating means is a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the second character, The gaming machine is characterized in that in a state where the character setting information is initialized, the character setting information regarding the second character is set.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a performance according to the player's character setting information, and by attracting the player's interest, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a surprising performance and enhance the gameplay.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has performance elements (for example, characters, the sound mode of the sound output means, the light emission mode of the light output means, the display mode of the display means, the movable a setting means (e.g., custom function) capable of setting performance element setting information regarding the movement mode of the body), an initialization means capable of initializing the performance element setting information of the performance element, and one or more of the Special date and time information corresponding to production elements (for example, birthdays, after a certain period of time has passed since the installation of a gaming machine, the date of installation of a new gaming machine (new machine), the opening date or renewal opening date of a gaming parlor, the opening date of a gaming parlor, etc.) storage means (e.g., RAM) for storing at least event dates, event periods, holidays, year-end and new year holidays, Golden Week, etc.); and time information generation means (e.g., real-time clock (RTC)) capable of generating at least date and time information. , a game machine equipped with a production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, a lamp, an LED, a production movable body) capable of executing a production, and the production means includes the production element set by the setting means. It is possible to execute a production according to the setting information, and the production elements include a first production element (for example, a character of the palace, a first sound mode, a first light emission mode, a first display mode, a first a movable mode) and a second performance element (for example, a princess character, a second sound mode, a second light emitting mode, a second display mode, and a second movable mode), and the setting means , when the date and time information of the time information generation means is not a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the performance element, and the performance element setting information is initialized (for example, when the gaming system 10, the performance element setting information regarding the first performance element can be set in a state in which the game machine is logged out from 10, the power is turned on to the power-off game machine, and the game machine is reset. The setting means is configured to initialize the performance element setting information when the date and time information of the time information generation means is a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the second performance element. In this state, the performance element setting information regarding the second performance element can be set, and the performance means is configured to set the date and time information of the time information generation means in the selection display for selecting the performance mode. If the period is included in the special date and time information that corresponds to the second performance element, a display that allows you to recognize that the period is included in the special date and time information that corresponds to the second performance element ( For example, the palace icon TI shown in FIG. 40(e) with the birthday icon BI added, the princess icon HI shown in FIG. 40(f) with the birthday icon BI added, and the birthday icon HI shown in FIG. 40(g). This game machine is characterized in that it can display an unreleased small panda icon QI to which an icon BI has been added.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by providing a performance according to the player's performance element setting information, it is possible to appeal the custom function to the player and to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a surprising performance and enhance the gameplay. In addition, since it is possible to display a selection image that allows players to select a performance element in a manner that allows them to recognize that it is special date and time information corresponding to the second performance element, it is easier to inform players that it is a special date and time. , it becomes possible to increase the operating rate.

Further, the performance element includes a third performance element, and the setting means is configured to set a certain condition (for example, a condition for releasing an unreleased character, a condition for achieving a certain mission, a condition for acquiring a certain point). The performance element setting information regarding the third performance element may not be set until the certain condition is satisfied, and the performance element setting information regarding the third performance element may be settable by satisfying the certain condition. .

With such a configuration, the value and rarity of the second performance element can be increased, and the player's desire to play can be improved.

Further, the performance element may be a character (for example, a lord, an old man, a princess, a small panda, etc.).

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance according to the player's character setting information, and by attracting the player's interest, it is possible to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Further, the setting means may be configured to set the special date and time information (for example, date of birth and time of birth) corresponding to the second character when the certain condition is satisfied and the date and time information of the time information generating means corresponds to the second character. ), and the character setting information is initialized, the character setting information regarding the second character is set, and the setting means sets the certain condition. If not, and the date and time information of the time information generation means is a period included in the special date and time information corresponding to the second character, and the character setting information is initialized. In this state, the character setting information regarding the first character may be set.

With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the second character, make the second character feel special, and provide an unexpected effect, which improves the game experience. It is possible to increase the player's desire to play.

<Counting notification and alert notification>
Next, the count notification and the alert notification will be explained using FIGS. 41 and 42.

The game machine according to this example is configured to calculate the number of game values (for example, the number of acquired medals and the number of game balls) from outside the game machine (for example, at a rental machine) by operating the first operation means (for example, a counting button not shown). ) A counting means capable of executing a counting process (for example, a process of transmitting information on the number of medals recorded in a medal number control unit to a lending machine) to be outputted to a lending machine; and a notifying means capable of executing a count notification regarding the counting process ( For example, the notification means includes a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, lamps and LEDs), and the notification means may (or always does) a warning notification regarding the login state when executing the count notification. It is configured.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present example transfers gaming value (for example, medals and game balls) to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, to the medal tray 161, A payment means capable of executing a payment process (e.g., a process of discharging medals and game balls) to a tray for game balls), and a notification means capable of performing a payment notification regarding the payment process (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 157, a speaker) 272, 277, lamps and LEDs), and the notification means is configured to sometimes (or always perform) a warning notification regarding the login state when executing the payment notification.

Count notifications and alert notifications will be explained below, but the technical concept of “count notifications related to counting processing” can also be applied to “settlement notifications related to payment processing”, and the phrase “counting processing” is The phrase "count notification" can be replaced with "settlement notification."

Therefore, for example, a counting process display that indicates that a counting process is in progress (for example, a display of the character string "Counting...") is a checkout process that indicates that a settlement process is in progress. It can be applied by replacing it with a middle display (for example, displaying the character string "Calling out..."), and can be applied to count notifications that notify that the counting process has been completed (for example, a voice saying "Counting is complete"). (output) can be replaced with and applied to a settlement notification (for example, output of a voice saying "Payment has been completed") to notify that the settlement process has been completed.

In addition, the technical philosophy regarding "alert notification" performed when executing "count notification regarding counting processing" can also be applied to "alert notification" performed when executing "settlement notification regarding payment processing." can.

Therefore, for example, warning alerts regarding two-dimensional codes (e.g., outputting a voice that says, "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code") or warnings about prepaid cards (e.g., "Be careful not to forget to read the card!"). "Alert" alerts regarding errors (e.g., "An error has occurred. Call a store clerk.") are issued when executing "Payment Notification Regarding Payment Processing". ” can also be applied.

<Counting notification and alert notification/custom voice>
FIG. 41(a) is a diagram showing an example of count notification and alert notification using a custom voice (old man's voice).

<Count notification and alert notification/custom voice/M game>
The state indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. 41(a) is a state in which the player has logged into the gaming system 10 and has started playing M (M is a positive integer) games.

The gaming machine according to this example has a setting means (for example, a custom function) that can set count notification setting information regarding count notification (for example, count notification setting information that sets the voice of a certain character (custom voice) for the count notification). ).

After logging into the gaming system 10, the player uses the cross key 191a to tentatively select (select) the submenu "Character Select" of the menu explained using FIG. By performing a pressing operation (determination operation), it is possible to execute a function (custom function) corresponding to the submenu "Character Select".

In this example, before starting the Mth game, after logging into the gaming system 10, the character setting information (setting information) is set to Grandpa by the custom function (setting means), and this causes the count notification to be Count notification setting information is set in which the voice is the voice of the grandfather character (grandfather voice).

Here, the item "Character setting status 1" in FIGS. 41 and 42 indicates character setting information that is applied to effects other than count notification, among the character setting information, and the item "Character setting status 2" The item indicates character setting information that is applied only to count notification among character setting information. In this example, before starting the Mth game, character setting status 1 (other than count notification) and character setting status 2 (count notification) are both set to the character setting information corresponding to the old man's character using the custom function. has been done.

Note that the "setting information" according to the present invention is not limited to character setting information regarding characters (types of characters such as lord and grandfather), but may also be game information such as game level and earned points, for example. In this case, the "count notification" and "settlement notification" according to the present invention are provided in a manner according to the gaming information (setting information) (for example, a manner according to the gaming level, the acquired points, etc. (the higher the gaming level and the acquired points, the more the notification is )) may be used.

Furthermore, for example, it may be an audio aspect (e.g., BGM, sound effects, lines, music, volume, etc.) of the sound output from a sound output means (e.g., a speaker), and in this case, the "counting" according to the present invention may be used. "Notification" and "Payment Notification" may be in a manner corresponding to the audio mode (setting information) of the voice (for example, output of voice in the set audio mode). Furthermore, for example, it may be the emission mode (e.g., emission color, emission mode, light amount, etc.) of the light output from the light output means (for example, a lamp or LED), and in this case, the "count notification" according to the present invention may be used. " or "Payment notification" may be a mode corresponding to the light emission mode (setting information) (for example, light output in the set light emission mode).

For example, it may be a display mode (for example, background color, background image, etc.) of a display by a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device), and in this case, the "count notification" or "settlement notification" according to the present invention may be used. may be in a mode depending on the display mode (setting information) (for example, display by a display means in a set display mode). For example, it may be the movable mode (for example, vibration, rotation, operation, stop, etc.) of the movable body (for example, the performance movable body), and in this case, the "count notification" or " The "settlement notification" may be in a manner corresponding to the movable manner (setting information) of the movable body (for example, notification by the movable body in the set movable manner).

Further, the "setting information" according to the present invention includes one or more of these characters, the sound mode of the sound output means, the light emission mode of the light output means, the display mode of the display means, and the movable mode of the movable body. , or a combination of all.

<Count notification and alert notification/custom voice/before logout operation for M+100th game>
In FIG. 41(a), the state indicated by the symbol T2 is the state in which the M+100th game has been started in the logged-in state, and the state indicated by the symbol T2a is the state in which the third stop has been performed in the M+100th game, and the state indicated by the symbol T2b The state indicated by is a state in which a logout operation was performed in the M+100th game.

In the login state, the game machine according to this example is capable of executing count notification (for example, count notification using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice)) according to the count notification setting information set by the setting means.

During the gaming period (T1 to T2b) from the start of the Mth game indicated by the symbol T1 in FIG. You are logged in.

During the gaming period (T1 to T2b) in the logged-in state, if the player performs a counting operation using an operating means (for example, a counting button not shown), a process of updating the number of medals (number of gaming values) obtained In addition to executing counting processing including ) is displayed.

In addition, during the gaming period (T1 to T2b) in the logged-in state, character setting status 1 (other than count notification) is set to the old man, so in performances other than count notification, the performance according to the character setting information of the grandfather ( For example, since the character setting situation 2 (count notification) is set to the old man, the count notification is performed using the voice of the old man character (the old man voice). do.

In the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, the speaker 272, 277 uses the voice of the old man character (old man's voice) to notify that the counting process has been completed. "It's completed!" will be output.

Note that the content of the "count notification" according to the present invention is not limited to a count notification to notify that the counting process has been completed, but includes, for example, a count notification to notify the start of the counting process (for example, a count notification to notify that the counting process has been completed). It may be a voice output saying, ``Let's start counting!'', or a count notification to notify that the gaming system 10 will be in a logout state as the counting process is completed (for example, a voice saying, ``After the counting is complete, you will be in a logout state.'') It may be a voice output) or a count notification that notifies that an error has occurred in the counting process (for example, a voice output saying "An error has occurred. Call a store clerk").

Furthermore, the notification mode of the "count notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the sound output by the sound output means, but instead of (or in addition to) the sound, a display may be performed by the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157). It's okay.

When the count notification is performed by displaying on the display means, for example, it may be a count notification to notify that the counting process has been completed (for example, displaying a character image of an old man and the line "Counting is complete"). , it may be a count notification that notifies the start of the counting process (for example, the display of an old man's character image and the line ``Let's start counting''), or the gaming system 10 may log out along with the counting process. It may be a counting notification that informs you that a state has been reached (for example, displaying an old man's character image and the line "After counting is completed, you will be logged out"), or it may be a counting notification that indicates that an error has occurred in the counting process. The notification may be a count notification (for example, display of a character image of an old man and the lines ``An error has occurred. Call a store clerk.'').

<Count notification and alert notification/custom voice/after logout operation for M+100th game>
The state indicated by the symbol T2b in FIG. 41(a) is a state in which a logout operation has been performed in the M+100th game.

Even if the game machine is in the logged-out state, the game machine according to the present example is configured by the setting means in the logged-in state until a certain condition is satisfied (for example, until at least one game is executed after being set in the logged-out state). It is possible to perform counting notification according to the counting notification setting information that has been set (for example, counting notification using the voice of the old man character (old man's voice)).

The gaming period (from T2b) after the logout operation is performed in the M+100th game is a logout state in which the player is logged out from the gaming system 10.

During the gaming period (T2b~) in this logged out state, the two-dimensional code will be displayed at the end, and the character setting status 1 (other than the count notification) will be initialized and set to the default (initial setting). Therefore, in performances other than the count notification, a performance according to the character setting information of the hall (for example, a performance in which the character of the hall appears) is executed.

In addition, when the complete function described later is activated, the configuration may be such that the 2D code at the time of completion is automatically displayed, or if the operation to display the 2D code at the time of completion is performed, the 2D code at the time of completion is displayed. It may be configured to display the code. In either case, when the two-dimensional code is displayed at the end, the setting information is initialized and logged out, and character setting status 1 (other than count notification) and character setting status 2 (count notification) are changed to default (initial setting). ). Furthermore, the setting information may be initialized upon activation of the complete function.

On the other hand, in this example, even if the gaming period is in the logged-out state (from T2b), the gaming period in the logged-in state continues until at least one game is executed after being set to the logged-out state (until a certain condition is met). Since it is possible to execute the count notification according to the count notification setting information set in (T1 to T2b) (in this example, count notification by the voice of the old man character (Old man voice)), character setting situation 2 (count notification The count notification is held by the old man, and the count is notified by the voice of the old man's character (the old man's voice).

Therefore, until at least one game is executed after being set to the logout state (for example, if you log out from the gaming system 10 while a counting operation is being executed, or if the counting operation is not performed immediately after logging out from the gaming system 10). (e.g. when the count is counted), after executing the counting process or displaying the counting process in progress (for example, displaying the character string "Counting..."), the old man's character is displayed according to character setting status 2 (counting notification). Execute count notification by voice (old man's voice).

In the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, as shown in FIG. A counting notification (in this example, a voice saying "Counting is completed" is output) is performed to notify that the counting has been completed.

According to this example, since it is possible to execute count notification according to the count notification setting information set by the player, it is possible to increase the desire to participate in the game and to improve the convenience for the player. Can be done. In addition, since there are a certain number of players who count the number of game values after logging out, even if they are logged out, the count notification setting information that was set in the logged in state will not be counted until a certain condition is met. By making the count notification executable, player satisfaction and convenience can be increased.

In addition, when the slot machine according to the present example executes count notification according to the count notification setting information (for example, count notification using the voice of the old man's character (grandfather voice)), the slot machine according to the present example also provides notification regarding game information (for example, the count notification using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice)). The character's voice (old man's voice) may be used to alert the user, and if a certain condition is met (if more than the specified number of games have been played after being logged in), The system is configured to provide notifications (for example, notifications regarding game information).

During the gaming period (T2b~) in the logged-out state, more than the specified number of games (in this example, more than 100 games) have been played since the logged-in state was set (a certain condition is met). , when executing count notification (count notification according to count notification setting information) using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice), alert notification (notification regarding game information) is executed.

In the alert notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, as shown in FIG. Following the count notification to notify that the count has been completed (in this example, a voice saying "Counting is complete" is output), a warning notification regarding the two-dimensional code (in this example, a warning message saying "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code!") is issued. ” output).

According to this example, by attracting players' attention to the notification regarding game information as well as the count notification, forgetting to take the game information (forgetting to record the game information) can be prevented, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the player. You can increase your sexuality.

Note that the content of the "certain notification" according to the present invention is not limited to a warning notification regarding a two-dimensional code, but may, for example, be a warning regarding a prepaid card (for example, ``Be careful not to forget to take out your card''). It may be a voice output that says, "An error has occurred. Call a store clerk," for example, or a warning regarding an error (for example, a voice that says, "An error has occurred. Call a store clerk."). Alternatively, it may be a warning unrelated to game information (for example, a voice output such as "Don't forget anything" or "Take your cards home").

In addition, the counting process is not limited to "notification according to the counting notification setting information", that is, "notification corresponding to the character set by the custom function", for example, the counting process is completed with the voice of the old man's character (old man's voice). Even in the case where a count notification is executed to notify that the user has done something, an alert notification may be executed using a voice of a hall character (a hall voice) different from that used in the count report.

Further, the notification mode of "certain notification" according to the present invention is not limited to the sound by the sound output means, but instead of (or in addition to) the sound, a display by the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) may be used. You may go.

When the count notification is performed by displaying on the display means, for example, it may be a warning notification regarding the two-dimensional code (for example, displaying a character image of an old man and the line "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code"). However, it may be a warning about prepaid cards (for example, displaying an old man's character image and the line "Be careful not to forget to take out your card"), or a warning about errors (for example, displaying an old man's character It may be a display of an image and the line "An error has occurred. Call a store clerk.").

Furthermore, the "certain condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the fact that a specified number of games or more have been played after being logged in, but even if the user has logged in but has not played any games. Alternatively, the prescribed number of games may be a number of games other than 100 games, or may be a condition that is satisfied when the user is logged in.

Furthermore, in a game machine that allows the collection and storage of game information even when the player is not logged into the system corresponding to the game system 10 of this example (non-login state), the player can select the submenu "Character Select". The condition may be satisfied when a menu corresponding to `` is selected and opened at least once.

<Count notification and alert notification/custom voice/3rd stop operation at M+101st game>
The state indicated by the symbol T3 in FIG. 41(a) is a state in which the player has logged out of the gaming system 10 (non-login state) and has started the M+101st game.

Although not shown, if you are staying at the custom character stage in the M+101st game, the performance in which the lord appears (custom character stage) is executed.

On the other hand, in this example, until the third stop operation is performed in the M+101st game (until a certain condition is satisfied), the count notification setting information that was set during the gaming period (T1 to T2b) in the logged-in state is Since it is possible to perform count notification (in this example, count notification using the voice of the grandfather character (Grandpa voice)), character setting status 2 (count notification) is held in Grandpa, and the voice of the grandfather character (Grandpa voice) is executed. It is possible to perform counting notification by

According to this example, the characters that appear in performances other than the count notification can be made different from the characters in the count notification, and it is possible to perform a novel performance that has not been seen before.

The state indicated by the symbol T3b in FIG. 41(a) is a state in which the third stop is performed in the M+101st game.

This state is a state in which one game (M+101 game) was executed (a certain condition was met) after the logout operation was performed in the previous M+100th game. Count notification setting information in which the voice of the character (old man voice) is invalidated, and count notification setting information in which the sound of the count notification is the voice of the lord's character (dono voice) becomes valid. As a result, in the same state, character setting situation 1 (other than count notification) and character setting situation 2 (count notification) are both set to Tono.

Note that the count notification setting information that is set when the count notification setting information is initialized is not limited to the count notification setting information in which the voice of the count notification is the voice of the hall's character (the hall voice), but also the voice of the count notification. The count notification setting information may be the voice of another character (for example, a princess character).

<Counting notification and alert notification/Tono voice (default voice)>
FIG. 41(b) is a diagram showing an example of count notification using a voice (default voice).

In the state indicated by the symbol T4 in FIG. 41(b), the third stop operation is performed in the M+99th game, and the counting operation is performed by the player after the character setting situation 2 (count notification) is switched from Oji to Tono. It is in a state of

In the same state, character setting situation 1 (other than counting notification) and character setting situation 2 (counting notification) are both set to Tono, so the player can count using the operating means (for example, counting button not shown). When the operation is performed, a count notification is performed using the voice of the lord's character (dono voice) according to character setting situation 2 (count notification).

Specifically, in the counting notification of this example, when the counting process is completed, as shown in FIG. , a counting notification is made to notify that the counting process has been completed (in this example, a voice saying "Counting is complete" is output).

According to this example, it is possible to limit the period during which count notification can be executed according to the count notification setting information set by the player, so that other players do not feel bothered.

In addition, when the game machine according to this example executes count notification according to the count notification setting information (for example, count notification using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice)), the game machine according to the present example also provides notification regarding game information (for example, the count notification using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice)). If a certain condition is not met (if more than the specified number of games have not been played after being logged in), It is configured so that notifications regarding game information are not provided.

In the example shown in FIG. 41(b), since the specified number of games or more (in this example, 100 games or more) have not been played since the login state was set (a certain condition is not met), The alert notification (notification regarding game information) using the voice of the old man character (grandfather voice) as shown in FIG. 41(a-2) is not performed.

Note that the condition for whether or not to execute the alert notification (whether or not the number of games exceeding the specified number (in this example, 100 games or more) has been played since the login state was set) is not limited to the above condition. If there is, it may be executed regardless of the number of games, or it may be executed if the number of games is equal to or greater than a specified number, regardless of the login state.

According to this example, since it is possible to use the presence or absence of notification depending on the setting of conditions, it is possible to prevent notification regarding game information from becoming a bothersome notification. Moreover, the notification is not made at unnecessary timing, and the notification regarding the game information can be prevented from becoming a bothersome notification.

<Count notification and alert notification/Modification 1>
Next, a first modification of count notification and alert notification will be described using FIG. 42(a).

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing another example of the switching timing of character setting situation 2 (count notification).

In the example using FIG. 41(a), when the logout operation is performed in the M+100th game, the timing at which the third stop operation is performed in the next M+101st game (the next M+101st game ends) is An example is shown in which the character setting status 2 (count notification) is switched from Oji to Tono (default) at the timing indicated by symbol T3a).

However, the "certain condition" according to the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 42(a), when a logout operation is performed in the M+100th game, the next M+101st game starts. At the timing (timing indicated by symbol T3), the character setting situation 2 (count notification) may be switched from Oji to Tono (default).

According to this example, the form of count notification can be changed at the start of the game, and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced compared to the case where the form of count notification is changed in the middle of the game.

Further, the "certain condition" according to the present invention includes "when at least one game is executed after being set to the logout state", "when one game is started after being set to the logout state", and "when a game is started after being set to the logout state" This is not limited to "when one game is completed after being set to the logout state", but for example, when playing a certain game after logging out (for example, after playing more games than one game, such as the second game or the fifth game) This may be the case when the user starts (or ends) a game (game), the case where the demonstration performance is started (or ends) after logging out, or the case where counting notification or settlement notification is executed once after logging out. It may be the case that RAM is cleared, settings are changed, reset, power is restored after power failure, power is turned on, power is turned off, etc., or one, more than one of these conditions, or , all conditions may be used.

<Count notification and alert notification/Modification 2>
Next, a second modification of count notification and alert notification will be described using FIG. 42(b).

FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing an example of a count notification and an alert notification when the player is set to the logout state and then enters the login state again before one game is executed.

In FIG. 42(b), the state indicated by symbol T2b is a state in which a logout operation was performed in the M+100th game, and the state indicated by symbol T2c is a state in which a login operation was performed in the M+100th game.

If the gaming machine according to this example is set to the logged-in state while it is in the logged-out state and before a certain condition is satisfied, the game machine will respond to new setting information even before the certain condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that the count notification is executed in accordance with the aspect.

In the example shown in FIG. 42(b), after the logout operation is performed in the M+100th game and the login state is set, before one game (M+101 game) is executed (before a certain condition is satisfied) , In the M+100th game, the login operation was performed and the login state was set, so the count notification (in this example, the princess) according to the character setting information newly set in the login state (in this example, the princess) Execute count notification using the character's voice (princess voice).

In this example, when the counting process is completed, the speakers 272 and 277 use the princess character's voice (princess voice) to notify that the counting process has been completed. Following this, a warning message regarding the two-dimensional code is output (in this example, a voice saying, "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code") is output.

According to this example, even if a custom counting completion voice function is provided, there is a certain number of players who count after logging out (issuing a 2D code at the end of the game). By retaining the counting completion voice until a certain condition is met even after the custom function is issued, all players can enjoy the custom function. On the other hand, if another character is set again after logging out (issuing a two-dimensional code at the time of exit), there is a high possibility that the player did so on purpose (or the next player will ), the convenience will be further improved by using the new setting for the counting completion voice.

<Counting notification and alert notification/Summary>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a game machine that can execute a counting process including a process of updating the number of game values (for example, the number of medals acquired). A value number control means, a notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing count notification regarding the counting process, and character setting information regarding the character (for example, the voice of the count notification is transmitted to the character of the old man). a setting means (for example, a custom function) capable of setting a character setting information set by the setting means; The counting notification (for example, counting notification using the voice of the old man character (old man voice) shown in FIG. 41 (a-2) (outputting a voice saying "Counting is complete")) is possible in a corresponding manner; This game machine is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform count notification according to the character setting information set by the player, so that it is possible to increase the desire to participate in the game, and also to provide convenience for the player. You can increase your sexuality.

The present invention also includes a production means capable of executing a production, and an initialization means capable of initializing the character setting information, and the production means is configured to perform a production according to the character setting information set by the setting means. If the character setting information is initialized by the initializing means, the rendering means executes the rendering corresponding to the initialized state; , even if the character setting information is initialized by the initialization means, the character is The count notification may be executed in a manner corresponding to the character setting information set by the setting means before the setting information is initialized.

With such a configuration, there will be a certain number of players who count the number of game values after logging out, so even if the character setting information is initialized by logging out, the game value will be counted until a certain condition is met. By making it possible to perform count notification according to the character setting information set in the logged-in state, it is possible to increase player satisfaction and convenience.

Further, the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied when at least one game is executed after the character setting information is initialized by the initializing means.

With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the period during which count notification can be executed according to the character setting information set by the player, so that other players do not feel bothered.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a game value number control means that can execute a counting process including a process of updating the number of game values (for example, the number of acquired medals). and a notifying means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277) capable of executing count notification regarding the counting process, wherein the notifying means executes the count notification. , a certain notification (for example, an alert notification using the voice of the old man character (old man voice) shown in FIG. 41 (a-2) (outputting a voice saying "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code")) This is a game machine that is characterized by:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to execute a certain notification when performing count notification, it is possible to increase the desire to participate in the game and to improve the convenience for the players. can. In addition, by making the player interested in a certain notification as well as the count notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take game information, etc., and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, the notification means may be configured to notify the user when a certain condition is satisfied (for example, when more than a specified number of games (for example, 100 games or more) have been played since the login state was set). The notification means may not make the certain notification when the certain condition is not satisfied.

With such a configuration, it is possible to use the presence or absence of notification depending on the setting of conditions, so it is possible to prevent notification regarding game information from becoming a bothersome notification.

Additionally, there is an operation means (for example, a cross key 191a, an OK button 191b, etc.) that allows a password (for example, a login password) to be input, and a login state is set when the password input by operating the operation means is valid. and a state management means, wherein the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied at least when the state management means sets the login state.

With such a configuration, no notification is made when the player is not logged in, and it is possible to prevent notifications regarding game information from becoming bothersome notifications.

Additionally, there is an operation means (for example, a cross key 191a, an OK button 191b, etc.) that allows a password (for example, a login password) to be input, and a login state is set when the password input by operating the operation means is valid. and a state management means, wherein the certain condition is a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of games or more (for example, 100 games or more) are played after the state management means sets the login state. It may be.

With such a configuration, notifications will not be made at unnecessary timing, and notifications regarding game information can be prevented from becoming bothersome notifications.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a first operation means (for example, a cross key 191a, an OK button 191b, etc.) and a second operation means (for example, a counter button) and counting processing including processing to update the number of game values (e.g., the number of acquired medals and number of game balls) (e.g., transmitting information on the number of game medals recorded in the number of medals control unit to the lending machine) Login is performed by operating a gaming value number control means capable of performing a processing), a notification means capable of performing a count notification regarding the counting process (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277), and the first operation means. a state management means capable of setting a state, and the counting process outputs the number of game values to the outside of the game machine by an operation by the second operation means. The notification means may make a certain notification when executing the count notification, and the certain notification may be a notification to call attention to the login state (for example, a notification in FIG. 41(a- This game machine is characterized by the output of the voice of the old man character shown in 2) (the old man's voice) saying, "Don't forget to read the two-dimensional code."

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to execute a certain notification when performing count notification, it is possible to increase the desire to participate in the game and to improve the convenience for the players. can. In addition, by making the player interested in a certain notification as well as the count notification, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take game information, etc., and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a first operation means (for example, a counting button) and a second operation means (for example, a cross key 191a, an OK button 191b). etc.), and a counting process (for example, a counting process that outputs the number of game values (for example, the number of acquired medals and the number of game balls) to the outside of the game machine by the operation by the first operating means (for example, the number of game values recorded by the number of medals control section). A counting means capable of transmitting information on the number of game medals held to the lending machine) and a notification means capable of transmitting count notification regarding the counting process (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, lamps and LEDs) ), a state management means capable of setting the login state when the password inputted by the operation by the second operation means is valid, and a production means capable of executing production. The password is associated with setting information, the state management means is capable of setting the login state to the logout state based on a logout operation by the second operation means, and the notification means can execute the counting notification (for example, the output of the voice of the old man character (old man voice) saying "Counting is complete" as shown in FIG. 41 (a-2)) in a manner according to the setting information. and the production means is capable of executing a production according to the setting information (for example, a production in which an old man character appears), and the production means is set to the logout state by the state management means. performs an effect corresponding to the logout state, but the notifying means is configured to perform an effect corresponding to the logout state until a certain condition is met even if the state management means sets the logout state. The count notification is executed in a manner according to the setting information in the above, and the notification means is set to the logged-in state by the state management means before the certain condition is satisfied in the logged-out state. Even before the certain condition is satisfied, the count notification (for example, by the voice of the princess character (princess voice) shown in FIG. 42(b-1)) is performed in a manner according to the new setting information. This game machine is capable of outputting a voice saying "Counting is complete."

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if a custom function of counting completion voice is provided, there is a certain number of players who count after logging out (issuing a two-dimensional code at the end). By retaining the counting completion voice until a certain condition is met even after the two-dimensional code is issued, all players can enjoy the custom function. On the other hand, if another character is set again after logging out (issuing a two-dimensional code at the time of exit), there is a high possibility that the player did so on purpose (or the next player will ), the convenience will be further improved by using the new setting for the counting completion voice.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a first operation means (for example, the payment button 134) and a second operation means (for example, the cross key 191a, the OK button 191b, etc.), and a settlement process (for example, discharging the gaming value (for example, medals or game balls) to the outside of the game machine (for example, the medal tray 161 or the game ball tray) by the operation by the first operating means. For example, a payment unit capable of executing a process of paying out medals or game balls), and a notification unit capable of executing a payment notification regarding the payment process (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, speakers 272, 277, a lamp or an LED), A game machine comprising: a state management means capable of setting a login state when a password inputted by an operation by the second operation means is valid; and a performance means capable of executing a performance. , the password is associated with setting information, the state management means is capable of setting the login state to the logout state based on a logout operation by the second operation means, and the notification means is configured to The settlement notification (for example, the output of the voice of the old man character (old man voice) saying "Counting is complete" as shown in FIG. 41 (a-2)) can be executed in a manner according to the setting information, The performance means is capable of performing a performance according to the setting information (for example, a performance in which an old man character appears), and when the state management means sets the state to the logout state, the performance means executes a performance according to the setting information. Although the performance corresponding to the logout state is executed, the notification means executes the effect corresponding to the logout state until a certain condition is satisfied even when the state management means sets the logout state. The settlement notification is executed in a manner according to the information, and if the notification means is set to the logged-in state by the state management means while in the logged-out state and before the certain condition is satisfied, Even before a certain condition is met, the payment notification (for example, outputting a voice saying "Payment is completed" in the voice of a princess character (princess voice)) is executed in a manner according to the new setting information. This game machine is characterized by the fact that it is possible.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if a custom payment completion voice function is provided, there is a certain number of players who make payment after logging out (issuing a two-dimensional code at the time of completion). By retaining the payment completion voice until a certain condition is met even after the two-dimensional code is issued, all players can enjoy the custom function. On the other hand, if another character is set again after logging out (issuing a two-dimensional code at the time of exit), there is a high possibility that the player did so on purpose (or the next player will (There is a high possibility that the customer has started the transaction), the convenience will be further improved by using the new setting to use the checkout completion voice.

Further, the certain condition may be a condition that is satisfied when at least one game is executed after the state management means sets the logout state.

With such a configuration, notifications will not be made at unnecessary timing, and notifications regarding game information can be prevented from becoming bothersome notifications.

<Two-dimensional code display when complete function is activated>
Next, the two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated will be explained using FIG. 43.

Here, the "complete function" means that the difference (maximum difference, so-called MY value) between the maximum value of the number of differences obtained in game value (for example, medals) and the minimum value of the number of differences obtained is a certain value (in this example 19000) (when the complete function is activated), it is a function that notifies the execution of the game stop (complete function activation notification) and also stops the game.

Note that if the complete function is activated in the AT state, the AT state ends immediately and the state shifts to the normal state. Furthermore, if the complete function is activated during the bonus game, the bonus game may be immediately ended and the normal state may be entered, or the normal state may be entered after the bonus game is completed.

If the complete function is activated, it is possible to reset (cancel) the complete function by turning on the power or changing the settings, but since the power cannot be turned off during business hours of the game store, it is virtually impossible to use the complete function during business hours. It is not possible to reset (cancel) the complete function.

<Two-dimensional code display/display example 1 when the complete function is activated>
FIGS. 43(a) to 43(f) are diagrams showing an example of a two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

In this example, after logging in to the gaming system 10, the character setting information is set to Grandpa using the custom function, and as a result, the count notification setting information sets the voice of the count notification to be the voice of the Grandpa character (Grandpa voice). is set.

The state shown in FIG. 43(a) is a state where a game is being played while logged in to the gaming system 10, and the state shown in FIG. 43(b) is a state where a predetermined game has elapsed since the state shown in FIG. 43(a). The situation is as follows.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(b), the maximum difference in the number of medals from the start of the game reaches 18,500, and when there are 500 medals left, the complete function is activated and the game is stopped, so the complete function is activated. A complete operation advance notice is being issued.

In the complete operation advance notice of this example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a complete operation advance notice display ST1 indicating that the complete function will be activated (in this example, a character string "Soon to be discontinued.") is displayed. ) is displayed, and the speakers 272 and 277 output a completion activation warning sound (in this example, the old man's voice saying ``It will be discontinued soon'') indicating that the complete function will be activated. .

The state shown in FIG. 43(c) is a state in which a predetermined game has passed since the state shown in FIG. 43(b), and the maximum difference in the number of medals has reached 19,000.

The slot machine according to this example includes a counting means (for example, a counter) capable of counting the number of game values (for example, the maximum difference between medals), a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157), and a two-dimensional code generation means. and the display means is capable of displaying a game stop suggestion notification (for example, complete function activation notification) that suggests execution of game stop when the number of game values reaches a certain value (for example, 19000). Yes, the two-dimensional code generation means can generate a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination) even if the display means displays a game stop suggestion notification, and the display means can generate a two-dimensional code (for example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination) When displaying a notification, a two-dimensional code can be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 43(c), the maximum difference number of medals (number of game values) has reached 19000 (a certain value) and the complete function has been activated, so a complete function activation notification indicating execution of game stop is issued. (Game stop suggestion notification) ST2 (in this example, a character string "Stop, game will be stopped.") is displayed.

In addition, since the complete function has been activated, the two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed at the end of the game without any operation by the player's operating means (automatically), and the display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end of the game is erased. The exit button EB and an explanation of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of exit (in this example, the text string "Please read the two-dimensional code with your terminal and save your gaming records on the mobile site") are displayed. .

The player reads the end two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 50b with the mobile terminal device 70 or the like to obtain the URL information, and reads the obtained URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (a website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of times the game has been played, the number of ATs, mission accomplishment information, and custom character release information.

According to this example, when a game stop suggestion notification (in this example, complete function activation notification ST2) is displayed, a two-dimensional code (in this example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination) can be displayed, so that the game can be stopped. In addition to notifying you that the game will be stopped, you can also obtain a two-dimensional code even if the game is stopped, which increases the convenience of the player and prevents you from forgetting to retrieve game information. Forgetting to record game information can be prevented. Furthermore, since the two-dimensional code is automatically displayed when the game is stopped, it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

In addition, this example shows an example in which when the complete function is activated (when the maximum difference in medals reaches 19,000), the two-dimensional code CD1 is automatically displayed at the end without any operation by the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the two-dimensional code CD1 may be displayed at the time of termination when an operation by the player using the operation means is accepted. In this case, the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination is It is preferable not to display the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 36(d) before displaying the dimensional code CD1 (the method for displaying the two-dimensional code is different from that before the completion function is activated).

According to this example, a method of displaying a two-dimensional code (in this example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination) before displaying a game stop suggestion (in this example, complete function activation notification ST2) (for example, a two-dimensional code at the time of termination) Before displaying the code CD1, a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. A method of displaying the two-dimensional code after displaying the stop suggestion (for example, not displaying the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 36(d) before displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end, or (The two-dimensional code CD1 is automatically displayed at the end without any operation by the operating means). Therefore, the difference in the display method of the two-dimensional code can indicate that the game will be stopped, and the player's Convenience can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 3(c), since the complete function is activated and the two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed at the time of completion, the gaming system 10 is able to complete the process automatically without the player's operation using the operating means. ), the state changes from logged in to logged out.

Also, since you are logged out, the counting notification setting information that sets the counting notification voice to the voice of the old man character (old man voice) is initialized, and in this example, the counting notification voice is set to the default (initial setting). Count notification setting information is set to be the voice of the hall's character (the hall's voice).

The state shown in FIG. 43(d) is the state in which the display end confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of end has started.

In the same state, since the termination decision operation was performed using the termination button EB while the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination shown in FIG. A display completion confirmation display RC2 is displayed to confirm the display.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

The state shown in FIG. 43(e) is a state in which counting processing is being executed, and the state shown in FIG. 43(f) is a state in which counting processing has been completed.

In the state shown in FIG. 3(e), since the player has performed a counting operation using the operating means (for example, a counting button not shown), the counting process including the process of updating the number of game values is executed, and the LCD screen In the display area of the display device 157, a counting process display (in this example, a character string "Counting...") is displayed to notify that the counting process is being executed.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 6(f), the counting process has been completed, and the counting notification setting information is set so that the voice of the counting notification is the default (initial setting) voice of the lord's character (the lord's voice). Therefore, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a counting notification (in this example, a display of the character string "Counting Complete") is displayed to notify that the counting process has been completed, and the speakers 272 and 277 A count notification (in this example, a voice saying "Counting is complete") is performed using the voice of the hall character (the hall voice) to notify that the counting process has been completed.

As described above, when the complete function is activated, the user enters a logout state (because the two-dimensional code CD1 is displayed upon completion). And, unlike the normal logout state (when the complete function is not activated), even if no game is played after being set to the logout state (as soon as the logout state is reached), the count notification voice will be activated. is the default (initial setting).

According to this example, the completion function is not activated because the count is notified using the voice of the default lord character (Tono voice) instead of the voice of the old man character set by the player using the custom function (Old man voice). It is possible to audibly recognize that the player has entered the logout state, thereby increasing convenience for the player.

<Two-dimensional code display/display example 2 when the complete function is activated>
FIGS. 43(g) to 43(j) are diagrams showing modified examples of two-dimensional code display when the complete function is activated.

The state shown in FIG. 43(g) is a state in which a predetermined game has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 43(b), and the maximum difference in the number of medals has reached 19,000.

In the same state, the maximum difference number of medals (number of game values) reaches 19,000 (a certain value) and the complete function is activated, so a complete function activation notification (gaming stop suggestion notification) indicating the execution of a game stop is issued. In addition to displaying ST2 (in this example, display of the character string "Stop, stop the game."), a guidance display GP (main text) informing that the menu can be displayed by pressing the production button 192 is displayed. In the example, the character string "Display menu when button is pressed" is displayed.

The state shown in (h) of the same figure is a state in which a menu display operation (eg, pressing operation of the OK button 191b) is performed in the game shown in (g) of the same figure, and the display of the menu is started.

In the same state, since the complete function has been activated, all of the multiple submenus except the submenu ``Record and Exit'' and the submenu ``Return'' are displayed in black and cannot be selected by selection operation.

The state shown in FIG. 5(i) is a state in which the submenu "record and end" decision operation has been performed in the menu display shown in FIG. 4(h).

In this state, since the complete function has already been activated, a display start confirmation display (for example, a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 36(d)) is displayed to confirm whether or not to start displaying the two-dimensional code CD1. ) without displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination, the end button EB for erasing the display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination, and the explanation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination (in this example, Please scan the two-dimensional code with your device and save your gaming records on the mobile site.'' is displayed.

The player reads the end two-dimensional code CD1 displayed on the display device (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 50b with the mobile terminal device 70 or the like to obtain the URL information, and reads the obtained URL information. By accessing a specific mobile site (a website managed by the management computer 30) based on It is possible to save game-related information such as the number of times the game has been played, the number of ATs, mission accomplishment information, and custom character release information.

The state shown in (j) is a state in which the display end confirmation display of the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of end has started.

In the same state, since the termination decision operation was performed using the termination button EB while the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination shown in FIG. A display completion confirmation display RC2 is displayed to confirm the display.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent the two-dimensional code from being erased due to an erroneous operation or the like before it is read, and it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

<Two-dimensional code display/summary when complete function is activated>
As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has a counting means (for example, a counter) that can count the number of game values (for example, the maximum difference in medals). , display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157), access information (e.g., URL information) for accessing an external server (e.g., management computer 30 shown in FIG. 34), and game information regarding games (e.g., number of games played). , the number of times each winning role was won, the number of times each performance was executed, the number of ATs, mission achievement information, custom character release information, etc.); , the display means is configured to display a game stop suggestion notification (for example, FIG. 43 Complete function activation notification ST2) shown in (c) can be displayed, and the two-dimensional code generating means can display the two-dimensional code (for example, A two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination shown in FIG. 43(c) can be generated, and the display means can display the two-dimensional code when the game stop suggestion notification is displayed. It is a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, it is possible to notify that the game will be stopped, and even when the game is stopped, the two-dimensional code can be obtained, which is convenient for players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to take game information (forgetting to record game information).

Also, a method of displaying the two-dimensional code before displaying the game stop suggestion notification (for example, displaying a display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 36(d) before displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the end of the game) or displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination based on the operation by the player's operating means), and a method of displaying the two-dimensional code after displaying the game stop suggestion notification (for example, displaying the two-dimensional code CD1 at the time of termination) Before displaying the code CD1, the display start confirmation display RC1 as shown in FIG. 36(d) is not displayed, or the two-dimensional code CD1 is automatically displayed at the end without any operation by the player's operating means) may be different.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the game will be stopped depending on the display method of the two-dimensional code, and it is possible to improve convenience for the player.

The display device further includes an operation means (for example, a cross key 191a, an OK button 191b, etc.), and when the display means displays the game stop suggestion notification, the display means displays the two-dimensional code without operating the operation means. It may be possible.

With such a configuration, the two-dimensional code is automatically displayed when the game is stopped, thereby increasing convenience for the player.

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention.

Therefore, for example, the present invention can be applied to a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. Further, in this embodiment, a blessing display and the like are described as a display that may or may not be accompanied by an animation, but the present invention is not limited to these displays.

Therefore, for example, it may be an icon (for example, a pending icon or a floating icon), and specifically, if an icon occurs before transitioning to SP reach, it is displayed with an animation (in the first display), When moving to SP reach, the icon disappears once, and when SP reach ends, it is redisplayed, but at this time, the icon may not be accompanied by animation. In addition, a power outage/recovery may be used as a trigger for the display, which may or may not be accompanied by animation, to disappear (re-display).

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Reel window 123 Announcement lamp 127 Payout number display 130, 131, 132 Medal input button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Production image display device 192 Production button 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control section 400 First sub-control section 500 Second sub-control section

Claims (2)

a setting means capable of setting one of the plurality of presentation states;
operating means,
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of performance states include a certain performance state,
When a certain operation is performed by the operating means during a first period of the certain performance state, displaying an explanation display regarding the certain performance state;
When the certain operation is performed by the operating means during the second period of the certain performance state, a menu display is displayed without displaying an explanation display regarding the certain performance state,
A first display regarding the explanatory display can be displayed during the first period,
In the first period after the display of the explanation display is finished, the first display is not displayed;
When the certain operation is performed by the operation means during the first period when the first display is not displayed, displaying the explanatory display;
The first display is a display notifying that the explanation display can be displayed.
A game machine characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
A demonstration effect is executed during the first period in which the first display is not displayed, and in a certain period after the demonstration effect ends, the first display is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: